ABB High Voltage Products

Operation Manual SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear
Erection and Maintenance GIS
ABB AG - High Voltage Products

¤ Product Manual GIS
Overview
Main List of Documents
Erection and Maintenance

1 ¤ Delivery
1.1 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 706 B
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 100
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 101 A
1.4 Building Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 707 B
2 ¤ Installation
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 200 L
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 015 C
2.3 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 733 E
2.4 Compact Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 722 C
2.5 Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 724 B
2.6 Coupling of Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 726 C
2.7 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 728 C
2.8 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 730 C
3 ¤ Commissioning
3.1 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 740 J
3.2 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 742 L
4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions

4.1 Gas Density Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 418 D
4.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 750 G
4.3 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . 1HDG 518 425 D
4.4 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1 . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 753 E
4.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 747 H
4.6 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . 1HDG 918 757 E
4.7 Separate Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 758 A
4.8 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 410 A
4.9 Inductive Voltage Transformer VT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 759 B
4.10 Surge Arrester Type AZ0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 575 C
4.11 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 451 A
4.12 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 471 E
4.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 429 A
1
Overview
5 ¤ Service
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 500
5.2 SF6 gas absorber pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 787 A
5.3 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 520 E
5.4 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 786 D
5.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 783 J
5.6 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . 1HDG 918 784 E
5.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 518 510
5.8 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1HDG 918 785 D
2
Content
Erection and Maintenance
Content
1 ¤ Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Transport ................................................. 1.1-1
1.1.1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.3 Container data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.5 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.2 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses during transportation . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.4 Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.5 Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-1
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.1 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.2 Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.4 Parts and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3
1.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5
1.4 Building Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.1 Static and Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.2 Building Requirements and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
ToC − 1
Content
2 ¤ Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-2
2.1.3 Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-3
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-4
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-4
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
2.3 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-2
2.3.2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-2
2.3.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3
2.3.4 Local Control Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3
2.3.5 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-4
2.3.6 Busduct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-8
2.3.7 Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-9
2.3.8 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-9
2.4 Compact Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1
2.4.1 Preparation of Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.2 Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4
2.5 Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.5.1 Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.5.2 Separate Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . 2.5-2
2.5.3 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.4 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.5 Control Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.6 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
2.5.6.1 Cable Glands with Earthing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
2.5.6.2 Cable Glands without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring 2.5-4
2.6 Coupling of Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.1 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Adjustment Screws 2.6-1
2.6.2 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Fill Plates . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.3 Coupling of the Feeder Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.6.4 Mounting and Dismounting of the Transversal Erection
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-3
2.7 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-1
2.7.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector/Earthing
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-2
2.7.2 Voltage Transformer on the end of a Busbar . . . . . . . . . 2.7-4
2.7.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector / Earthing Switch . 2.7-5
2.8 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-1
2.8.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector / Earthing
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-2
2.8.2 Surge Arrester on the end of a Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-4
2.8.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector/Earthing Switch . 2.8-5
ToC − 2
Content
3 ¤ Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.1 Tools for On-Site Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2 Inspection after Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors . 3.1-3
3.1.5 Check of Gas Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.6 Dew Point Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.7 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices 3.1-4
3.1.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-4
3.1.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . 3.1-5
3.2 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.1 Performance of the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2 Calculation of the Test Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-3
3.2.3 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-5
3.2.3.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position 3.2-7
3.2.3.2 Connection to the Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.3 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End, Type EHSVS . . 3.2-10
3.2.4 HV Cable-Test at Cable End Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
3.2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
3.2.4.2 Carrying out the High Voltage Test at the Cable . . . . . . 3.2-11
ToC − 3
Content
4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Gas Density Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.1 Design and Operating Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-3
4.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.2.1 Design of the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-2
4.2.2 Operating Mechanism of the Interrupting Chamber . . . 4.2-2
4.2.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
4.2.4 Operating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-4
4.3 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.2.1 Slow Switching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.2.2 Storage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3
4.3.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3
4.3.4 Instructions for the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-4
4.3.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness . . . . . . 4.3-4
4.3.4.2 Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-5
4.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-6
4.3.6 Spare Parts, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.7 Tightening Torques for Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.8 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.9 Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-8
4.4 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
4.4.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-2
4.4.1.1 Manually Operating the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . 4.4-2
4.4.1.2 Putting Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-3
4.4.2 Technical Data Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism . 4.4-4
4.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-1
4.5.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device . . . . . . . . 4.5-1
4.5.2 Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4
4.5.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present) . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
4.5.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-9
4.5.2.3 Hand crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-11
4.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-12
4.5.3.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-12
4.5.3.2 Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-13
4.5.3.3 Interlocking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-14
4.5.3.4 Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-14
4.5.4 Operating Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-15
ToC − 4
Content
4.6 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . . . . . . 4.6-1

4.6.2 Design and Operation Principle of the Drive . . . . . . . . . 4.6-2
4.6.2.1 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-3
4.6.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-5
4.6.3 Warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-6
4.6.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-7
4.6.4.1 Switching Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-7
4.6.4.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-8
4.6.4.4 Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-8
4.7 Separate Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-1
4.8 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-1
4.9 Inductive Voltage Transformer VT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-1
4.9.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-2
4.10 Surge Arrester Type AZ0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-1
4.10.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-4
4.11 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-1
ToC − 5
Content
4.12 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1

4.12.1 Design and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1
4.12.2 Security Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1
4.12.3 Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-2
4.12.4 Capacitive Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-4
4.12.4.1 Sensor at Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-4
4.12.4.2 Sensor at Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-5
4.12.5 Detection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-5
4.12.5.1 Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.2 Light Emitting Diodes (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.3 LC-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.4 Auxiliary Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.5.5 Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.5.6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.6 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.2 Wiring of Detection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.3 Wiring of Sensor at Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-9
4.12.7.4 Preparation of the Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-10
4.12.7.5 Wiring of Sensors at Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-11
4.12.8 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.1 Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.2 Threshold Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.9 Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.10 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-15
ToC − 6
Content
4.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1

4.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.1.2 Integrated control cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-2
4.13.1.3 Separate control cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-5
4.13.1.4 Variant for indoor application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-7
4.13.1.5 Variant for outdoor application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-7
4.13.2 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-8
4.13.3 Power Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-9
4.13.4 Heat Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-12
4.13.5 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.2 Intermediate Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.3 Condition of Switchgear Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-16
4.13.5.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-16
4.13.6 Conventional Bay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-17
4.13.6.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-17
4.13.6.2 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-19
4.13.6.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control . . . . . 4.13-22
4.13.7 Control System REF542plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-24
4.13.7.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-24
4.13.7.3 Completion of SCADA-System Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-33
4.13.8 Control System REC670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-34
4.13.8.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-34
ToC − 7
Content
5 ¤ Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1
5.2 SF6 gas absorber pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.1 Preparing the removal of the bursting disk assembly . . 5.2-2
5.2.2 Replacing the absorber pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-3
5.2.3 Replacing the bursting disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-4
5.2.4 Installation of the pre-assembled bursting disk kit . . . . 5.2-5
5.3 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.4 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.1 Inspection of the Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism 5.4-2
5.4.2 Exchange of the Interrupting Chamber
(3-pole and 1-pole Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-3
5.4.3 Commissioning after Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-6
5.5.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-2
5.5.2 Maintenance of the Current Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.2.1 Dismounting the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.2.2 Opening of the Transversal Erection Module . . . . . . . . . 5.5-4
5.5.2.3 Dismounting the Busbar from the GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-5
5.5.3 Replacement of the Moving and the Fixed Contacts . . 5.5-6
5.5.4 Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-8
5.5.5 Removing the Outgoing Disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-9
5.5.6 Reinstallation of the Outgoing Disconnector . . . . . . . . . 5.5-11
5.6.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism Motor . . . . . . . 5.6-3
5.6.3 Using the Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making
Capacity for Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-4
5.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-1
5.7.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker . . . 5.7-1
5.7.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-2
5.7.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-2
5.7.4 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 5.7-2
5.7.5 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.7.6 Other Switchgear Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.8 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.2 Information on Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.3 GIS Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-2
5.8.4 Material of the GIS-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-4
5.8.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components . . . 5.8-6
ToC − 8
Content
1 ¤ Delivery
Content
1.1 Transport ................................................. 1.1-1
1.1.1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-1
1.1.1.3 Container data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.5 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-2
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-3
1.1.2 Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses during transportation . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-4
1.1.3 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.4 Irregularities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-5
1.1.5 Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1-6
1.2 Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2-1
1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.1 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.2 Storage Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.3 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-1
1.3.4 Parts and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-3
1.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3-5
1.4 Building Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.1 Static and Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-1
1.4.2 Building Requirements and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4-3
05.09.2011
1-1
¤ Delivery
1.1 Transport
1.1.1 Packaging
1.1.1.1 Packaging requirements
The following factors must be taken into account when packaging equipment for
shipping:
− stresses occurring during multiple transshipments
− climatic conditions
− shipping routes
− duration of shipment (preservation, environmental factors)
− storage after shipment
− bottoms of containers must be designed to carry the full load of the package
equipment
− packaging must be able to withstand stresses caused by weight and by
forces occurring during transportation
− packaging must be geared to the intended type of transportation and de-
signed to preclude any damage to the equipment
− packaging / equipment may be provided with shock indicators
1.1.1.2 Types of packaging
Wooden support/skid and protective sheeting

− Only for shipment by truck, by rail or by airway
− Not suitable for storage
− To receive on crane use only the crane-eyelets of the switchgear!
Wooden box
− For shipment by truck, rail or ship
− Suitable for storage
Container
− For shipment by truck, rail or ship
− Suitable for storage
Requirements for container

− Container must have nailable wooden floors
Types of container
− within Europe: − Type HTT 6.254 (20’)
− overseas (to ISO standards): − Type 20/8 and 20/8 ½
− 20’ steel dry cargo container
door height 2.26 − 2.28 m
door height 2.58 m
− If containers with any other designations are used, they must be equivalent
to those listed above.
1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-1

¤ Delivery
General container requirements

− Containers holding dangerous goods must be CSC-certified
− Containers bearing the ACEP mark are approved for unrestricted use
− Containers must be checked for proper technical condition prior to shipment
(Containers provided with the ACEP mark have been inspected by the manu-
facturer)
1.1.1.3 Container data

Container data concerning weight and dimensions should, as far as possible, be
geared to the related data for the intended means of transportation.
1.1.1.4 Environmental factors

Equipment may be shipped at temperatures in the range of −30°C to +60°C. The
packaging must ensure that all items of equipment are positively protected against
any direct contact with water. The packing shall provided adequate protection against
dirt, insects and animals.
1.1.1.5 Preservation
The shipment within Europe, specifications concerning equipment preservation shall
be included in the order. If no preservative measures are specified, the freight will be
packaged in the usual manner.
The preservation required depends on the method of transportation, the storage

classification and the storage period.
Storage requirements and classifications are described in detail in chapter “Delivery”

in document “Storage” 1HDG 518 101.
In the case of ocean transport, preservation of the equipment is mandatory, since GIS
components could be damaged by the associated exposure to humidity.
Protection against condensation of humidity is provided for a transportation period of

up to 12 months. If this period is exceeded, adequate measures must be taken to pre-
vent the formation of condensation water.
The packaging may be monitored by means of moisture indicators.
If the expiry date of equipment preservation falls within the period before or during
shipment, or within the expected storage period, persons responsible for ship-
ment / storage shall be informed in due time so that appropriate measures can be
taken.
1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment

For transportation the equipment is filled with N2 to a absolute pressure of 150 kPa.
The gas pressure shall not drop below 110 kPa during shipment and storage.
All open flanges must be sealed with a shipping cover.
Shipping covers are chosen according to 1HDG 931 100 (for buses without insulators
according to 1HDG 931 101 P1).

¤ Delivery
1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment

Packing and unpacking of equipment shall always take a place in a dry
(air-conditioned) environment.
When unpacking switchgear components, check shock indicators on packag-

ing / equipment, if provided.
1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment

Free-standing parts shall be provided with appropriate support structures.
All loads shall be prevented from slipping by lashing and blocking. Means of securing
equipment in place: Chains, lashes, ropes, square timber and wooden wedges.
Make sure that loads are evenly distributed.
The side walls of shipping containers shall not be subjected to any loads. Only con-
tainer bottoms are designed to withstand loading and possess sufficient stability.
The circuit breaker shall be shipped only in its upright (operating) position.
1.1.1.9 Shipping marks

Markings provided on the packaging shall include fixing and hitching points for trans-
portation and hoisting, total weight, installation point of equipment components, and
the packed unit’s centre of gravity.
The place of delivery shall be marked on the packaging in accordance with the data
provided in the order.
When dangerous goods are shipped, applicable regulations (of the countries of origin
and destination as well as transit countries) shall complied with.

¤ Delivery
1.1.2 Shipping
1.1.2.1 Loading and lifting facilities
To prevent equipment and parts from being damaged during loading and lifting oper-
ations, the facilities shall be suitable for this purpose in terms of intended applications
and load-carrying capacities.
When moving or lifting packed equipment, make sure that no other than the fixing and
hitching points marked on the packaging are used.
Switchbays and components which are not packed may be lifted at suitable hitching
points, provided that every precaution has been taken to prevent these parts from
being damaged in the process.
The shipping units’ centre of gravity markings shall be taken into account to prevent
the units from tipping over.
1.1.2.2 Means of transportation

The means for transportation shall be selected so as to ensure that the shipping units
will be subjected to the smallest-possible amount of vibration. Any damage to the
equipment must be prevented under all circumstances.
1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses during transportation

The forces are shown in Figure 1.1-1:
FL
FQ
FV
direction
Figure 1.1-1: Forces and stresses during transportation
Table 1.1-1: Forces in g (g = Acceleration due to gravity)
FL FV FQ
Railway 4.0 g 0.5 g 0.4 g
Road 1.0 g 2.0 g 0.6 g
Ship 0.4 g 2.0 g 0.8 g
Note During loading and lifting operations higher values may occur.

¤ Delivery
1.1.3 Inspections
Before shipment
Prior to closing the shipping containers, make sure that the equipment to be shipped
is properly secured and without damage.
Check shipping containers for proper technical condition. This is particularly important
in the case of freight containers.
After shipment
Check shipping container for any damage before opening.
After opening a container, immediately check the equipment for external damage and
completeness.
1.1.4 Irregularities
During shipment
Any damage occurring on the packaging in transit shall, as far as possible, be re-
paired immediately. If this cannot be done, appropriate measures shall be taken at
once to preclude any further damage of the cargo.
All irregularities occurring during shipment as well as any remedial action taken shall
be documented and reported.
After shipment
In the event of any damage detected on the packaging or equipment, the insurance
company shall be informed and the damage shall be assessed and recorded by an
authorized agent.
Photographs shall be taken of any damaged packaging to serve as evidence at a later

time.
Any packaging which is damaged or soaked shall under no circumstances be used for
prolonged storage of equipment.
Any corrective action taken with regard to packaging or equipment preservation shall
be recorded in detail. All materials used for these measure must have been tested
and approved.

¤ Delivery
1.1.5 Standards and regulations

The most important standards and regulations are:
− DIN 50 010 climatic definitions
− DIN 50 019 climates with regard to technology
− DIN 55 402 markings
− DIN 55 405 packaging
− DIN ISO 668 freight container
These standards also make reference to other pertinent standards which must be ob-
served as well.
Additional regulations, guidelines and instruction sheets have been issued by the fol-
lowing organizations:
− German Lloyd (GL-Regulations and codes of practice)
German Lloyd (GL-Vorschriften und Richtlinien)
− Association for Rationalization in Packaging/Packaging Consulting and Re-
search Office (RGV / BFSV Instruction sheets)
Rationalisierungsgesellschaft Verpackung/Beratungs- und Forschungsstelle
Verpackung (RGV / BFSV-Betriebsblätter)
− Association of german Engineers (VDI-Regulations and -Guidelines)
Verein deutscher Ingenieure (VDI-Vorschriften und -Richtlinien)
These regulations, guidelines, instruction sheets and the relevant standards must be
equally observed.
Standards and regulations of the country of destination shall be considered, if appli-

cable.
Applicable regulations and guidelines issued by ABB shall also be observed.

¤ Delivery
1.2 Receiving Inspection

Note All gas compartments of the individual GIS transport units are filled in our factory with N2
to a pressure of approximately 150 kPa. The only exception is the inductive voltage
transformer that will be delivered ex works filled with SF6 to a pressure of approximately
150 kPa. In order to detect transport damages as early as possible, check the pressure
upon arrival of the equipment at site. Gas compartments that are not pressurized have
to be checked for gas tightness prior to assembly of the transport units.
Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_____of_____

Table 1.2-1: Receiving Inspection
Number of Storage
Date Checked by Remarks, Measures, Checks
Transport Unit Class
1HDG 518 100 en 26.06.1998 ACEMEWE 29.06.1998 ACEHENE 1.2-1

¤ Delivery
1.3 Storage
1.3.1 Packing
Storage life depends on the types of packing material and drying agent being used.
Unless otherwise stated, items should remain in the original packing. The storage time
indicated in the delivery documents must not be exceeded.
Note Immediately unpack modules in damaged packing. Parts supplied sealed in plastic or
aluminium foil without damages should be handled with care and should not be unpacked
until shortly before required.
1.3.2 Storage Requirements

All storage areas must comply with the following general requirements:
S Good accessibility for transport and inspection
S Protection against damages
S Restricted access for authorized personnel only
S Guaranteed fire protection
S The storage area must be clean and free from unused packing material
S When stocking, the moisture contents of the packing must be considered
S Flammable material must be stored in a strictly separated area
S Compliance with all local regulations and requirements must be guaranteed
1.3.3 Classification
Every product must be protected from being damaged. This requires a definition of the
individual storage conditions. The classification will be defined from A through F as
follows:
A B C
F
D
E
A − Airconditioned storage building D − Tarpaulin

B − Storage building E − Unprotected outdoor storage
C − Shelter roof F − Container
Figure 1.3-1: Storage Classification
1HDG 518 101 A en 18.04.2005 EXTMEWE 26.04.2005 CHSVOTH 1.3-1

¤ Delivery
Table 1.3-1: Product Example
Classification A B C D E F
Instruments (electrical and electronic) or similarly sensitive

D
products
Paints D
Robust switchgear D
Less sensitive material D
Aluminium parts D
General outdoor material D
Hot dipped galvanized material D
Epoxy cast resin D
Table 1.3-2: Protection against ...
Pressure from stacking and/or excessive cramped packing D D D D D D
Mechanical damage D D D D D D
Rain and snow D D D D
Salty air D D D D
Extreme temperatures (beyond the permissible range) D D D
Detrimental humidity D D D
Temperatures supporting condensation D D
Dust pollution D D
Temperatures below −5 C D
Table 1.3-3: Storage Requirements
If not stated otherwise, product remains in original packing D D D D D D
Covered by shelter roof, protection against rain and snow D D D D
Fully enclosed D D
With temperature control according to the required storage

D D
temperature
Storage in refrigerated room D
With air filter, protection against dust and detrimental humidity D
With temperature control to prevent condensation D D
Protection against rats, insects etc. D D D

¤ Delivery
With ventilation D
With tarpaulin at minimum 400 mm above the product, sloped

D
for water shedding
With possibility for ventilation (open containers) D
Good drainage required D D
Containers respectively products to be stored at minimum 200

D D
mm above the floor
No standing water on the product D
1.3.4 Parts and Material

Table 1.3-4: Classification of Parts and Material for Site Storage
Parts Material, General Instructions Classification Inspections during Checks before Use
Finish storage
GIS bays and Store in the original Refer to Instructions

Subassemblies packing F for Installation and
Commissioning
If delivered on heavy
goods vehicle
C
If storage period is lon-
ger than 1 month, con-
nect the heaters in the
drive mechanisms
Control Cabinets Electrical Store in the original Measure humidity Touch up any dama-
Control Centers Equipment packing every 6 months ges to the paint finish
B
If storage period is lon- If relative humidity
ger than 1 month, con- exceeds 60 %, renew
nect the heaters in the drying agent
control cabinets
Bushings Porcelain Do not bend during sto- Check every Clean the surfaces
and rage 12 months whether all with Rivolta MTX forte
Silicon parts are dry; if not,
Bushings with sealing B refer to “Checks befo-
rings − refer to rubber re Use”
parts below
Make sure that the
Refer to the instructions parts are not subject
on the packing to stress of any kind

¤ Delivery
Parts Material, General Instructions Classification Inspections during Checks before Use
Finish storage
Flat Gaskets Rubber Store in the original pak- Check elapsed If necessary, clean
O-rings king storage time with soap and water or
O-seals a solution of 1.5 %
Sealing rings Protect from compres- Check surfaces for soda in water
sion, tension and twisting scoring or scratches
B
Protect from direct sun- Check the condition of Rinse with clear water
light and artificial light the vulcanized joints after cleaning
with a high ultra violet
contents Note:
The water temperature
Do not store together must be equal to the
with copper, manganese ambient temperature
metals or plastic foils
Steel Sections Hot dipped Material must be stored Check tarpaulins for Remove the white
galvanized on beams raised at mini- damages and replace, rust-preventive coating
mum 30 cm above the if necessary
floor E
Remove any rusty

binding wires
Bolts, Nuts Hot dipped Store in the original B

galvanized wooden and cardboard
steel boxes
Silver plated Alu- Galvanic The parts can be Check elapsed stora- Remove the transport
minium and Cop- and special stacked, but must be ge time packing
per processes secured against any
movement Randomly check Degrease the silver
silver plated surfaces plated surfaces with
Flexible copper and alu- B Rivolta MTX forte
minium connections shall Check cycle: every Fully remove all remai-
be stored in an upright 6 months in the first ning spots and marks
position and slotted into year, every 12 months
each other thereafter Grease the contact
surfaces with acid free
Check 6 months prior petroleum jelly (vaseli-
to use ne) and protect them
with crepe paper
Castings, Sheet Aluminium Store in the original Check for water pene- Use in accordance
Metal, Sections crates tration after heavy with manufacturer’s
and Tubes out of D rain fall instructions
Aluminiumm Crates must be stored
on beams raised at Check tarpaulins for
minimum 30 cm above damages and replace,
the floor if necessary
Paints, lacquers, Do not store next to any A Randomly check six

thinners, harde- heat source months prior to use
ners

¤ Delivery
1.3.5 Checks
The following checks shall be performed and documented upon delivery to site and
periodically thereafter (take photos of any damages):
S Product designation
S Tightness of packing, covering, sheds and other protective means
S Check the heater connections / activate the heaters
S Check the transport gas filling for appropriate pressure
S Document any mechanical damages
S Keep the storage area clean
S Conform with any additional storage requirements of the manufacturer
S Conform with any additional site storage instructions
S Keep all packing properly sealed to reduce the oxidizing effect of the air

¤ Delivery
1.4 Building Requirements

1.4.1 Static and Dynamic Loads
Circuit Breaker Cable Sealing End

340 340
100
250
15KN
680
500
300
1 2
250
15KN
100
200 650 1050 350 350
700
620 1525
2145
1 GIS base frame (2x MSH100x100)
2 dynamic load points of circuit breaker
Figure 1.4-1: Load points double busbar bay with cable sealing end, VT and LCC

¤ Delivery
Figure 1.4-1 represents a typical double busbar feeder. The loads result from static
and dynamic forces due to bay weight and circuit breaker operation.
For each individual layout the mechanical forces are calculated and a corresponding
drawing is made.
Static Loads
The loads below are calculated per GIS base frame.

S 2 busbars without voltage transformer and local control cubicle 2 x 11 kN
S 1 busbar without voltage transformer and local control cubicle 2 x 10 kN
S additional load for local control cubicle 2 x 1.5 kN
S additional load for voltage transformer 2 x 2.5 kN
Dynamic Loads
The dynamic loads are measured in a normal industrial building.

Table 1.4-1: Dynamic Loads due to 40 kA design
Load case Load per point (kN) Impulse time (ms) f (Hz)
On-operation
- 2.8 / 2.8 20 - 50 65
(tension / pressure)
Off-operation
-8/5 10 - 30 45
(tension / pressure)
The dynamic loads are evenly distributed on the load points 2 . The forces upwards
(4 x 8 kN) are reduced by the weight of the bay.
Installation
The bay is delivered with a base frame. The base frame will be welded on a
straightening iron (C-rail), which is integrated in the concrete floor.
If there is no iron structure the GIS supports are to be mounted with chemical anchors
M12 x 160 mm or equivalent.
Max. tensile load per anchor in concrete with minimum stability B25 / DIN 1045 is
10 kN. Dowel depth: 110 mm.

¤ Delivery
1.4.2 Building Requirements and Dimensions

Figure 1.4-1 and Figure 1.4-3 show the recommended dimensions for a GIS in double
busbar layout. Other layouts may require smaller or larger dimensions.
The room tolerances and planeness should be equal or better than DIN 18202 which
means:
Planeness (mm) 5 8 12 15 20
on Distance (m) 0.1 1 4 10 15
Final overall dimensions are to be defined in cooperation with the client.
Option
3600
2825
2115
500
(minimum space
ca. 600
(usual case)
for walking)
ca. 1400
2000
1700
ca. 3600
5500
Figure 1.4-2: Side view double busbar feeder

¤ Delivery
Factors to be considered for building dimensions:

S Existing building or other installed equipment
S Type of HV connections: Cable, transformer SF6 gas-to-oil bushing or
SF6-air bushing
S High voltage cable data, type and outlet direction
S Location of GIS local control cabinets
S Type of lifting device
The recommended lifting capacity (depending on the weight of heaviest transport unit)
is 30 kN, service crane: 10 kN.
For vertical connection the cable basement normally has a height of 2 m.

WxH=3000x3000
C160
5500
Circuit
Breaker
C160
min.2000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1200

ca. 12000
Figure 1.4-3: Plan View
Figure 1.4-3 shows a 8-bay arrangement. The standard width of a bay is 1 m.

The building dimensions can be easily determined based on the number of bays.
For a convenient and fast HV-cable sealing end assembly, openings for the cables
made 0.5 m x 0.7 m are recommended, see Figure 1.4-1. For special cases contact
ABB.
The large front door (left side in Figure 1.4-3) is the equipment access door
(width x height = 3 m x 3 m). The second door is a standard access door which
is provided for convenience and safety.

Content
2 ¤ Installation
Content
2.1 Installation of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-1
2.1.2 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-2
2.1.3 Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-3
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-4
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1-4
2.2 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2-1
2.3 Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-1
2.3.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-2
2.3.2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-2
2.3.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3
2.3.4 Local Control Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-3
2.3.5 Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-4
2.3.6 Busduct Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-8
2.3.7 Surge Arresters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-9
2.3.8 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3-9
2.4 Compact Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-1
2.4.1 Preparation of Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-3
2.4.2 Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4-4
2.5 Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.5.1 Temporary Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-1
2.5.2 Separate Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . 2.5-2
2.5.3 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.4 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.5 Control Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-2
2.5.6 Cable Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
2.5.6.1 Cable Glands with Earthing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5-3
2.5.6.2 Cable Glands without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring 2.5-4
2.6 Coupling of Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.1 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Adjustment Screws 2.6-1
2.6.2 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Fill Plates . . . . . . . 2.6-1
2.6.3 Coupling of the Feeder Bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6-2
2.6.4 Mounting and Dismounting of the Transversal Erection Module . .
2.6-3
2.7 Inductive Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7-1
2.7.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector/Earthing Switch ....
2.7-2
2.7.2 Voltage Transformer on the end of a Busbar . . . . . . . . . 2.7-4
2.7.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector / Earthing Switch . 2.7-5
2-1
Content
2.8 Surge Arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-1

2.8.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . .
2.8-2
2.8.2 Surge Arrester on the end of a Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8-4
2.8.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector/Earthing Switch . 2.8-5
2-2
¤ Installation
2.1 Installation of the GIS

These instructions refer to the installation of a GIS and to all works that require open-
ing a gas compartment.
WARNING! All actions described in this chapter may only be executed if all notes, cautions and
warnings of the product documentation, especially the safety instructions in
chapter “Operating Instructions” in document 1HDG 518 020 “Safety Instruc-
tions” have been read and were understood and that all given conditions are ful-
filled. Otherwise, the manufacturer will not take any responsibility due to damages
caused by improperly handling.
It must be possible to clean the shoes before entering the immediate working area.
The working clothes must be made of non-fluffing material.
2.1.1 Preparation of the Installation Area

Securing the Installation Area:
The installation area must be secured against entry of unauthorized personnel.
Power Supply:
The following power supply outlets must be made available in the installation area:
S 1-phase AC outlets (16 A) and
S 3-phase AC outlets (16 A)
Walls and Ceilings:

S Walls and ceilings have to be in a condition, that neither dirt nor plaster might
fall or rub off
S If necessary, apply a surface-binding coat of paint
S Formation of condensation water on the ceiling has to be prevented under
any circumstance
Floor Conditions:
S The floor in the installation area must have a firm surface
S It must be possible to keep the floor dust-free with a vacuum cleaner
Outdoor Installation:
S In case of an outdoor installation of the GIS or of GIS components, open gas
compartments must be protected from the entry of dust or humidity (e. g. by
means of installation covers, tarpaulins etc.)
Room for Repair Works:
A room must be provided for necessary repair works that is:

S weather protected
S lockable
S separated from the installation area
1HDG 518 200 L en 17.08.2007 EXTMEHA 25.09.2007 CHSFRVW 2.1-1

¤ Installation
2.1.2 Cleaning
CAUTION SF6 can loose its arc quenching and insulating properties when contaminated. For
this reason, all surfaces and components that will be in contact with SF6 have been
thoroughly cleaned in our factory and have been installed under conditions of ut-
most cleanliness. When working on open devices or gas compartments, avoid the
entry of or contact with dirt, sweat and humidity at any time.
Water, acid contamination and oxygen (especially when simultaneously present) can
cause corrosion that might have a negative impact on the mechanical function of the
GIS components.
Water, especially when combined with acid contamination, can reduce the dielectric
strength of the GIS due to condensation at low operating temperatures and high pres-
sure. For this reason, the degree of contamination has to be limited to a level that cor-
rosion and/or condensation are of no significance.
Installation Area:
Prior to opening a gas compartment, thoroughly clean and vacuum clean the installa-
tion area, especially in the immediate vicinity of the flanges to be connected. Avoid
dust disturbance in the installation area.
Note Carry out a visual inspection of the interior of an open gas compartment.
Note Rub the insulators and all teflon parts with a cloth moistened with a suitable cleaning
agent. Cleaned insulators may only be touched wearing disposable latex gloves. Do not
use water for cleaning under any circumstance!
Cleaning the GIS Components:
Immediately before assembly, clean all loose metal parts and subassemblies that
have to be installed and all contacting and sealing surfaces.
Table 2.1-1: Material and cleaning agent
Material Cleaning agent
Flange sealing surfaces and O-rings

Contacting surfaces of the conductors
Connectors Rivolta M.T.X. 60 (preferably)
Links Ethanol 99
Screens Isopropanol, purity min. 99%
Insulators
Teflon parts
painted surfaces of the GIS pure water or soap suds (0.5%)
Silicon shielding of the bushing Wacker Silicon-Oilemulsion E 1044

¤ Installation
Use a non-fluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent. Rub all parts
with this cloth. Take note of the following:
S Try to avoid touching the components internal to the gas compartments
S Use disposable gloves for cleaning
S Use a spray bottle to prevent contamination of the cleaning agent
S Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the
cleaning agent
S Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
S Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth
Cleaning the painted GIS:
Painted surfaces are only allowed to be cleaned by means of pure water or soap suds
(0.5%).
Cleaning the silicon bushing :
Use a non-fluffing cloth for cleaning, moistened with the cleaning agent Wacker Sili-
con-Oilemulsion E 1044. Rub all the silicon shieldings with this cloth. Take note of the
following:
S Cleaning cloth must not contain any substances that could dissolve in the
cleaning agent
S Moisten the cloth so that the cleaning agent does not drip or spill
S Remove residues of the cleaning agent with a clean cloth
2.1.3 Flange Connections

Once the transport covers have been removed, the installation of the flanges must be
completed without interruptions.
If interruptions can not be avoided, open flanges must be covered with a clean plastic
foil. This instruction must also be observed if an insulator is mounted on the flange.
Sealing Surfaces:
S Check sealing surfaces for scratches or similar damages
S Even out any scratches with fine sand paper
S Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner
S Clean the sealing surfaces
O-Rings:
O-Rings have to be cleaned before they are installed (“2.1.2 Cleaning”).
Do not install any O-rings that show damages or deformation from previous use.
Before closing a flange connection, clean the immediate vicinity and all accessible
parts of the components to be connected with a vacuum cleaner. Do not touch the
active parts and the insulators with the vacuum cleaner’s nozzle.

¤ Installation
2.1.4 Tightening Torque for Bolts

The following tightening torques are valid for non-greased bolts in threads and holes.
Any deviations from these values are indicated in the assembly drawings.
Table 2.1-2: Tightening Torques for non-greased Bolts
Tightening Torque in Nm
Thread
Steel/8.8 *) Steel/A2-70 **) Aluminium ***)
M4 2,9 − 1,5
M5 6 5,2 3
M6 10 7,8 5,5
M8 25 19,5 14
M10 49 38,3 26
M12 86 67,2 45
M16 210 147,6 100
*) Extract from NB305080, tolerance "3%

**) Extract from GPDT049615, tolerance "3%
***) Extract from GPFA820006, tolerance +20% −0%, independent from the material of the
bolts
2.1.5 Filling of Gas Compartments

WARNING! All works related to SF6 are described in chapter “Gas insulated Switchgear” in
document 1HDG 518 005 “Gas-Handling” and have to be followed strictly!

¤ Installation
2.2 Conversion Tables

Temperature
Table 2.2-1: Temperature
°C (Degree Celsius) °F (Degree Fahrenheit)* K (Kelvin) **
0° 32 ° 273.16
15 ° 59 ° 288.16
20 ° 68 ° 293.16
25 ° 77 ° 298.16
30 ° 86 ° 303.16
*n °C = ( 1.8 x n + 32) °F
**n K= n − 273.16 °C
Tightening Torques
Table 2.2-2: Tightening Torques
Nm (Newtonmeter) lbf x ft kpm (Kilopondmeter)
1 0.7376 0.102
1.356 1 0.1383
9.807 7.233 1
Absolute Pressures
Table 2.2-3: Absolute Pressures
kPa MPa bar psi (Pound per Torr

(Kilo-Pascal) (Mega-Pascal) Square Inch)*
0.133322 0.0001333 0.001333 0.01934 1
6.8948 0.0068948 0.068948 1 51.715
100 0.1 1 14.504 750.06
420 0.42 4.2 60.917 3150.25
440 0.44 4.4 63.817 3300.26
500 0.5 5 72.520 3750.3
600 0.6 6 87.024 4500.36
620 0.62 6.2 89.925 4650.37
700 0.7 7 101.528 5250.42
* psig = pound per square inch gauge (overpressure)
psi may also be expressed as lbf / in2
1HDG 518 015 C en 13.07.2005 EXTMEHA 21.07.2005 CHSVOTH 2.2-1

¤ Installation
Force
Table 2.2-4: Force
N (Newton) lbf (Pound)
1 0.22481
4.4482 1
Length
Table 2.2-5: Length
mm (Millimeter) in (Inches)
1 0.03937
25.4 1
Weight
Table 2.2-6: Weight
kg (Kilogramm) t (Tons metric) lbm (Pound) US t (2000 lbm)
1 0.001 2.20462 0.0011
1000 1 2204.62 1.1
0.4536 0.00045 1 0.0005
507.185 0.907 2142.56 1
Volume
Table 2.2-7: Volume
gal (liquid) gal (dry) m3 ft3

l (Liter)
Gallons Gallons Cubicmeter Cubicfeet
1 0.26417 0.22702 0.001 0.03531
3.78541 1 0.85937 0.0037 0.13368
4.40489 1.16365 1 0.0044 0.15556
1000 264.17 227.02 1 35.31467
28.31685 7.48052 6.42851 0.02832 1

¤ Installation
2.3 Earthing
“Earthing” is defined as the entirety of means and procedures associated with the
earthing of equipment. Earthing means to connect a conductor via an earthing system
to earth.
“Earth” refers to both, the earth as a location and the earth as a substance such as
humus, clay, sand, gravel and rock. The earth is a conductor whose potential outside
the influence of earthing systems is considered to be zero. The “Reference Earth”
(neutral earth) is defined as a part of the earth, especially of its surface, outside the
influence of an earthing system in which between two random points no voltages de-
riving from the earth current can be measured.
“Earthing system” is defined as the entirety of electrically connected earthes, metal

parts acting similarly (e g. pole bases, armatures, metal cable sheathing) and earthing
leads.
“Earthing conductor” is defined as a conductor, that is embedded in and electrically

connected to the earth, or a conductor that is embedded in concrete. In the latter
case, the concrete is connected to the earth on a large area (e. g. foundation earth).
“Earthing lead” is defined as an electrical lead laid either outside the earth or insulated
in the earth, that connects a GIS part to be earthed with the earth. If a disconnecting
link, a disconnector or a Petersen coil is installed between a center point or an outer
conductor and the earth, only the connection between earth and the earthing terminal
of such a device is considered as an earthing lead.
Note The earthing of the GIS is to be documented in the site test protocol “Commissioning”
1HDG 518 680.
WARNING! The installation of the GIS earthing and the earthing leads shall be strictly in ac-
cordance with the project-specific earthing layout diagrams and the earthing plans
in the project-specific part of this documentation!
1HDG 918 733 E en 30.03.2010 EXTMEHA 06.04.2010 CHSFRVW 2.3-1

¤ Installation
2.3.1 Earthing of the GIS Bays

The individual modules of a GIS bay are interconnected through their enclosures.
Each GIS bay is connected to an earthing conductor by means of connecting bolts
and nuts and earthing leads. The connecting bolts and nuts must have minimum a
dimension of M12.
Crimping of the terminal ends, branch terminals etc. is carried out at site.
The GIS enclosure must be connected to earth. All metallic parts, that shall be
earthed and do not belong to a main or auxiliary circuit, shall be connected individually
to earth. Frames and supports do not need to be earthed separately if they are welded
or bolted to the GIS enclosure.
To be observed during Installation of the Earthing System

S All electrical connections within the earthing system shall be properly in-
stalled
S Earth leads shall be protected against mechanical damage
S Earth leads shall be installed without loops
S Earthing system shall not be interrupted at any point
S Earthing system shall be inspected before commissioning
2.3.2 Dimensioning
The GIS is dimensioned for a rated short-time withstand current of up to
40 kA / 3 sec.
All material necessary for earthing of the GIS is delivered together with the equipment.
Earthing
Cross section Short circuit duration 1 sec Short circuit duration 3 sec
Solid copper (Cu) 220 mm2 440 mm2
Copper rope (Cu) 2 x 120 mm2 4 x 120 mm2
Connect the earthing conductors of the GIS with 2 x M12.
Potential Earthing
Use 16 mm2 earthing conductors for potential earthing of the local control cabinets
and all other modules.
Connect the conductors for potential earthing with 1 x M12.

¤ Installation
2.3.3 Installation of the GIS Earthing

Earthing
The individual GIS bays are interconnected through the busbar enclosures.
Connect the circuit breaker base plate of the outer bays (Figure 2.3-1) each via
1 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec) with the building’s earthing grid.
If only one GIS bay is to be installed, attach 2 x 120 mm2 (1 sec) / 4 x 120 mm2
(3 sec) to the circuit breaker base plate (Figure 2.3-1).
Potential Earthing of the Busbar

S Either connect the busbar at both ends and at least every 3 m with the
earthing grid or the steel reinforcements in the floor (q 16 mm2 Cu)
... or ... connect the base plate of the circuit breaker in each GIS bay at the ends of
the steel reinforcements in the floor (q 16 mm2 Cu)
S Connection e. g. through earthing holes, slotted bars, earthing lugs
(q 16 mm2 Cu)
S Mounting rails incorporated in the floor have to be connected to the earthing
grid respectively the steel reinforcements in the floor
120 mm2
120 mm2
Figure 2.3-1: Position of Earthing Terminals
2.3.4 Local Control Cabinets

Earthing
The protective conductor bar is connected with the GIS enclosure through 1 x M12
earthing connection bolt and an earthing conductor (q 16 mm2 Cu).
Potential Earthing for separated Local Control Cabinets

1. Install the conductor for potential earthing (q 16 mm2 Cu) in parallel to the
control cables
2. Connect it to the GIS enclosure and the protective conductor bar inside the
control cabinet
3. In addition, connect the protective conductor bar for potential earthing with
the building’s earthing system (q 16 mm2 Cu)

¤ Installation
2.3.5 Cable Sealing End

Install the earthing connection between the cable jacket and the enclosure of the
cable termination as shown in Figure 2.3-3, Figure 2.3-5 or Figure 2.3-6:
The earthing of power cables terminated on the GIS is project-specific and is provided
and carried out by the cable supplier. The earthing points are marked with an earthing
symbol on the enclosure of the cable sealing end (Figure 2.3-2). The cable jacket
earthing (Figure 2.3-3 and Figure 2.3-5) is connected either unilaterally or in both
substations interconnected by the power cable (bilaterally).
1 2
2
2
1 − Earthing bracket
2 − Borehole for cable jacket earthing
Figure 2.3-2: Earthing Bracket and Earthing Points

¤ Installation
Bilateral Earthing
Connect on both sides as per Figure 2.3-3, or as per Figure 2.3-5 if ring-type current
transformers are installed at the cable.
Unilateral Earthing
Connect one side as per Figure 2.3-3 and the remote side as per Figure 2.3-6. For
surge protection install shock-proof surge arresters on the remote side.
Direct Earthing: Pressure Ring on each Phase
5
4
X
3
2 1 X
1 − Cable jacket earthing (optional) 5 − Thrust collar

2 − Earthing bolt 6 − Cable sealing end insulator
3 − Cable base plate 7 − Enclosure
4 − Earthing jumper 3x on periphery
Figure 2.3-3: Direct Earthing of Cable Sealing End

¤ Installation
Direct Earthing: Pressure Ring for all three Phases
Detail “W“
6
5
“W”
“W”
1
Z
View Z
4
1 − Earthing bolt 4 − Pressure ring

2 − Cable base plate 5 − Cable sealing end insulator
3 − Earthing jumper 6 − Enclosure
Figure 2.3-4: Direct Earthing with one Pressure Ring for all three Phases

¤ Installation
Direct Earthing with Ring-type Current Transformers
8
1 − Ring-type current transformer
7 2 − Cable jacket earthing (optional)
3 − Earthing lead passing through transformer
6 (2 to 4 times on the cable periphery), comin
and going leads tied together
4 − Earthing bolt
5 X 5 − Cable base plate
4 6 − Thrust collar
1 7 − Cable sealing end insulator
8 − Enclosure
3
Figure 2.3-5: Direct Earthing with Ring-type Current Transformer
Unilateral Earthing on Remote Side for IEC-Cable Sealing End
Note If no IEC-cable sealing end is used, the earthing shall be done on the GIS-side with the
surge arrester mounted on the remote side.
7
6
4 1 − Surge arrestor ABB type MVR 0,44 for cable

X
lengths  (50 m ... 100 m)
3 2 − Ring-type current transformer (optional)
3 − Earthing bolt
2 1 4 − Cable base plate
5 − Thrust collar
6 − Cable sealing end insulator
7 − Enclosure
Figure 2.3-6: Unilateral Earthing on Remote Side

¤ Installation
2.3.6 Busduct Connections

Outdoor bushings are connected to the steel reinforcements in the floor underneath
the GIS and to the ring earth electrode. The sleeve bearings in the contact areas of
the GIS busducts are to be bridged using the shortest possible route with a minimum
of 16 mm2 Cu (Figure 2.3-7).
For long busduct connections, the GIS enclosure has to be connected with all metal
parts that are being passed in close proximity.
Connect all parts installed outdoors to the external ring earth electrode using the
shortest possible route (Figure 2.3-7). In order to protect the following GIS compo-
nents sufficiently against the intrusion of electromagnetic waves, copper rope of 120
mm2 (1 sec) / 240 mm2 (3 sec) or solid copper must be used for such connections.
Busduct contact area

with insulating
intermediate layer
q 16 mm2 Cu
q 16 mm2 Cu
q 120 mm2 Cu
Detail X
Cross section:
120 mm2 (1 sec) /
240 mm2 (3 sec)
Figure 2.3-7: Earthing of Busduct Connections

¤ Installation
2.3.7 Surge Arresters

Conventional surge arresters, that are directly linked to the SF6-air bushings, must be
connected to the external ring earth electrode using the shortest possible route. Use
solid copper with a minimum cross section of 220 mm2 (1 sec) / 440 mm2 (3 sec) per
arrester pole.
SF6-encapsulated surge arresters are bolted to the GIS bay. In the base plate are
several tapped holes M12 which have to be used for the earthing connection. The
base plate of the surge arrester has to be connected by the shortest distance with
the GIS earthing.
Recommended Minimum Cross-sections for Earthing Conductors

S Copper: Cross-section 80 mm2
S Aluminium: Cross-section 150 mm2
2.3.8 Example
Example of a GIS earthing as shown in Figure 2.3-8 through Figure 2.3-10
1. Earthing of the first and the last GIS bay with copper rope:
Connect to the external ring earth electrode (1) diagonally with 1 x 120 mm2
(1 sec) / 2 x 120 mm2 (3 sec) on each side
2. Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcement in the floor:
Install at the bays on each end of the installation with 16 mm2 Cu, preferably
in each GIS bay, at minimum every 10 m (2)
3. Connect earthing to the external ring earth electrode and to the steel rein-
forcement in the floor (3)
4. Earth the local control cabinet (4) together with the GIS bay (Detail:
Figure 2.3-9)
Cross section:
120 mm2 (1 sec) /
240 mm2 (3 sec)
1,2 3
1
1 − Connection of the first and the last GIS bay to the earthing grid
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcements in the floor
3 − Connection to the external ring earth electrode and the steel reinforcements
4 − Connection of the local control cabinet and earthing through the GIS bay
Figure 2.3-8: Earthing of the GIS bay

¤ Installation
1,2
3
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcements
3 − Connection to the external ring earth electrode and the steel reinforcements
4 − Connection of the local control cabinet and earthing through the GIS bay
Figure 2.3-9: Earthing of the Local Control Cabinet

¤ Installation
1, 2
1, 2
4 4 4 4
2 − Equipotential bonding between GIS and steel reinforcement
3 − Connection of earthing to the external ring earth electrode and the steel reinforcement
4 − Connection of local control cabinet and earthing through the GIS bay
Figure 2.3-10: Earthing of the GIS

¤ Installation
2.4 Compact Cable Termination
8
7
9
3
2
10
11
1 − HV power cable 7 − Plug contacts
2 − Cable sealing ends of plug-type 8 − Disconnector
3 − Socket head screws (M12) 9 − Cable retaining struts
4 − Counter pressure ring 10 − Cable bracket retaining plate
5 − GIS flange 11 − Cable bracket
6 − Cast-resin insulator of socket-type
Figure 2.4-1: Installed Compact Cable Termination
The compact cable termination (Figure 2.4-1) of the GIS consists of a three-phase
cast-resin insulator (socket) (6), that is fixed to the GIS flange (5) with a counter pres-
sure ring (4).
The connection to the GIS conductors is done by means of plug contacts (7). The
cast-resin insulator (6) is completely tested and installed in the factory. The gas com-
partment of the disconnector (8) does not have to be opened for the installation and
testing of the HV power cable (1).

¤ Installation
WARNING! In case the cast-resin insulators are damaged, equalize the pressure inside the GIS
with the ambient pressure: release the N2 out of the disconnector gas compart-
ment and of the sockets. Afterwards dismount and replace the cast resin insulator
(6) (Figure 2.4-1).
For the installation of the HV power cables (1) the required cable sealing ends of plug-
type (2) are delivered to site. The installation of the plugs (2) onto the cable (1) and
afterwards to the cast-resin insulator must be supervised by ABB personnel. All
special instructions of the cable and the sealing end suppliers must be observed.
Check all parts delivered for intactness and completeness prior to commencement of
the installation. Replace all damaged components.
Installation of the Cable Sealing Ends on the Cast-Resin Insulator
Note Observe all safety regulations for working on high voltage switchgear during the
installation of the cable termination.
Note The tightening torques for non-greased bolts in threads and holes are listed in chapter
“Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of the GIS” in table “Tightening
Torques for non-greased Bolts”.
Required Materials
− Cleaning agent Rivolta M.T.X. forte
− Fluff-free cloth
− One-way gloves (clean and without talcum, abrasion-proof)
− 18 socket head screws M12 x 40
− Spring washers
− Auxiliary threaded bolts (to be provided by supplier of sealing plugs)
− SGF high voltage grease (to be provided by supplier of sealing plugs)

¤ Installation
2.4.1 Preparation of Plug Connection
1 − Cover
2 − Gas fitting
Figure 2.4-2: Cast-Resin Insulator with installed Cover
1. Release the transport gas (N2) from the cast-resin insulator (3) through the
gas fitting (2) (Figure 2.4-2)
2. Remove the cover (1) from the cast-resin insulator
3. Position the cable sealing end in front of the socket openings (the surface of
the stress cone (4) must be clean and dry) (Figure 2.4-3)
4. Clean the stress cone (4) with a fluff-free cloth using the cleaning agent
Rivolta M.T.X. forte prior to installation
5. Let the stress cone (4) air out for 10 minutes
6. Apply a thin and even layer of SGF high voltage grease with one-way gloves
(clean and without talcum, abrasion-proof) onto the stress cone (4)
3 4
3 − Cast-resin insulator
4 − Stress cone
Figure 2.4-3: Insertion of the Cable Sealing End

¤ Installation
2.4.2 Plug Connection

CAUTION The contacts of the cable sealing end must not touch the inner surface of the insu-
lator: Risk of damage!
1. Insert the cable sealing plug up into the insulator and press in as far as it will
go
2. Fix the cable sealing plug provisionally
3. Using the auxiliary threaded bolts, move the plug enclosure close enough to
the insulator that the connection can be tightened with the socket head
screws (6) with the fitted spring washers (1) (Figure 2.4-4)
4. Place the earth connection bracket (5) under one of the screws (6)
5. Evenly tighten all the screws (6) with a torque of 30 Nm
6. Crimp the screened wires (3) with a cable lug (4)
7. Install the cable lug (4) on the earth connection bracket (5)
8. Slide the shrink-fit hose (2) over the center of the plug housing
9. Shrink-on the shrink-fit hose (2) according to the instructions of the cable
sealing end supplier
10. Fit the star-shaped cable bracket retaining plate (10) to the cable retaining
struts (9) (Figure 2.4-1)
11. Connect the cable bracket (11) on the retaining plate (Figure 2.4-1)
12. Earth the cable screen according to customer’s information or project-spe-
cific engineering specifications
6 5 4 3
1 2
1 − Spring washers 4 − Crimped cable lug

2 − Shrink-fit hose 5 − Earth connection bracket
3 − Screened wires 6 − Socket head screws (M12 x 40)
Figure 2.4-4: Installation of Earth Connection Bracket
Note For the continuous operation without connected HV-cables, cable-dummies have to be
used. The sealing cover must be earthed.

¤ Installation
2.5 Local Control Cubicle

This document describes the installation of the conventional control cubicle and the
control cubicle with SCADA systems (SCADA = Supervisory Control And Data Ac-
quisition).
The local control cubicle (Figure 2.5-1) is the user interface for the operation of the
GIS. All electrical auxiliaries for command, signalling and interlocking are incorporated
in the local control cubicle.
Rear view
Section view
Figure 2.5-1: Local Control Cubicle
2.5.1 Temporary Storage

If the local control cubicles cannot be installed immediately upon their arrival at site,
they have to be temporarily stored in a dry and dustfree location.
Permissible Temperature Range for Storage at site:

S For dry air (max. 40 %) . . . : max. +55 _C
S For humid air . . . . . . . . . . . . : max. +40 _C
Packing that has been opened for inspection has to be closed and sealed as originally
delivered.
Note If the local control cubicles are unpacked, immediately activate the anti-condensation
heaters!
CAUTION Do not apply any adhesives to the painted surfaces of the local Control Cubicles!

¤ Installation
2.5.2 Separate Installation of the Local Control Cubicles

Normally the local control cubicles are installed and tested directly on the respective
GIS bay. As an exception, the local control cubicles can also be installed separate
from the GIS. In this case they are hardwired to the GIS bay. Before any installation
works commence, the GIS building has to be in a condition that prevents damages to
the GIS from humidity or dirt.
Requirements for the GIS Building:

S All windows and doors must be in place
S All walls and ceilings must be plastered, painted and dry
S Mounting frames, cable troughs and installation openings have to be installed
accurately and in strict accordance with the assembly drawings
S Once the installation of the local control cubicles has started, all work that
might generate dust or dirt must be stopped
2.5.3 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles

The local control cubicle is pre-installed in the factory. During the installation simply
activate the anti-condensation heater of the local Control Cubicle.
2.5.4 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle

1. Disconnect all cabinet voltages
2. Install loop wire connection between the previous and the following Control
Cubicle (refer to project-specific drawings)
3. Disconnect the wiring both, internal and external to the GIS bay
4. Dismount the control cubicle from the GIS bay
2.5.5 Control Cables

Plug-type Cables:
All control cables of plug-type are pre-manufactured and tested in the factory (parts
list “GSXE 030 160”).
Control Cables on the GIS:
With integrated local control cubicles the current and voltage transformers and the gas
density relays are connected in the factory according to the project-specific wiring dia-
grams.
The cable entries on the local control cubicle are dimensioned for the respective maxi-
mum cable cross section required at this location.
Note If cables with a smaller cross section shall be used, use bolted joints with the appropriate
reduction pieces!

¤ Installation
2.5.6 Cable Glands

The control cables are brought into the local control cubicles through cable glands.
Clamp the bracket for traction relief onto the cable jacket.
CAUTION The bracket for traction relief must not be clamped onto the cable jacket to be used
for earthing!
Note Pay attention to the connection between the cable glands and the sheet metal of the local
control cubicle. Abrade all paint from the contacting area!
2.5.6.1 Cable Glands with Earthing Ring

When using a cable gland with earthing ring, the cable jacket of the control cables is
earthed. The earthing of cables with a shield of copper mesh is realized by means of
a cable gland with cable shield contacting and a centering traction relief.
Earthing of the Cable Shield (Figure 2.5-2):

1. Strip the cable jacket (1)
2. Cut the cable shield (6) to the length of the earthing ring (7) (length of the
overhanging cable shield (6) equal to width of the earthing ring (7))
3. Disentangle the stripped portion of the cable shield (6)
4. Radially bend the stripped portion of the cable shield (6) outwards
5. Clamp the cable shield (6) between the two earthing rings (5) and (7)
180 mm
160 mm
7
6
5
4
3
1 − Insulated cable jacket of the 5 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)

control cable 6 − Cable shield
2 − Bracket for traction relief 7 − Earthing ring (tinned Cu)
3 − Thrust collar 8 − Hexagonal bottom
4 − Sealing ring
Figure 2.5-2: Earthing of a Cable Shield using a Cable Gland with Earthing Ring

¤ Installation
2.5.6.2 Cable Glands without Earthing Sleeve or Earthing Ring

When using cable glands without an earthing sleeve or an earthing ring, connect the
cable shield of the control cable to earth.
Earthing of the Cable Shield (Figure 2.5-3):

1. Strip the cable jacket of the control cable (1)
2. Disentangle the cable shield and twist to one side to a plait
(max. length of the plait: 10 cm)
3. Pull a yellow-green insulating sleeve (5) over the plait
4. Crimp a cable lug (4) onto the end of the plait
5. Connect the cable lug (4) to a PE bar or and earthing bolt
CAUTION A plait which is too long may result in malfunctions caused by transient over-
voltages. The length of the plait must therefore not exceed 10 cm.
1 − Control cable 4 − Cable lug (for connection to PE bar or

2 − Cable gland earthing bolt)
3 − Metal cover 5 − Twisted cable shield with yellow-green
insulating sleeve
Figure 2.5-3: Earthing of Cable Shield using a Cable Gland without Earthing Sleeve or
Earthing Ring

¤ Installation
2.6 Coupling of Feeders

Each feeder bay is mounted on a base frame in the factory. Depending on the size of
the line-up and the type of floor, there are two different methods of fixing the GIS:
S The circuit breaker base plate is connected to the base frame by means of
8 adjustment screws
S The circuit breaker base plate is directly bolted to the base frame and leveled
in the factory by means of fill plates
The first feeder bay is to be positioned according to the respective primary drawing.
Prior to starting the installation the levelness of the floor and the position of the wall
and floor openings have to the checked.
2.6.1 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Adjustment Screws

The first feeder bay has to be aligned using a spirit-level over the busbar connection
flanges.
Adjust the first feeder bay with the adjustment screws of the circuit breaker such
that the maximum permissible floor uneveness can be leveled out when installing the
remaining feeder bays, and that perfect coupling of all feeder bays is guaranteed.
2.6.2 Fixing the Base Frame by means of Fill Plates

If floor eveness is guaranteed (e. g. spacer bars), the leveled feeder bays can be
bolted directly to the base frame.

¤ Installation
2.6.3 Coupling of the Feeder Bays

The bays are filled with the transport gas N2 in the factory and closed with transport
covers.
1. Release the transport gas and remove the transport covers
Busbar Connection
1. Position the feeder bay to be connected according to the bay pitch
(800/1000) + [ 100
2. Make sure that the busbar flanges to be connected are:
S parallel and leveled
S within the prescribed tolerances (Figure 2.6-1)
3. Slide the feeder bay to be connected to the bay pitch measure 800 " 5
respectively 1000 " 5. Make sure that the contactors (4) are centered when
sliding over the conductor (2).
The bay pitch can be adjusted by means of the transversal erection module by
150 " 5 respectively 350 " 5. In order to do so, the transversal erection module has
to be released, and the enclosure can be shifted (Figure 2.6-2). Make sure that the
O-ring and the sealing surface of the enclosure are not damaged.
150 5
or
350 5
1
7
6
1 − Barrier insulator of adjacent module 5 − O-ring

2 − Conductor 6 − Enclosure of transversal erection
3 − Screw M12 module
4 − Contactor 7 − Cover
Figure 2.6-1: Busbar with Transversal Erection Module and Cover

¤ Installation
2.6.4 Mounting and Dismounting of the Transversal Erection

Module
The transversal erection module (Figure 2.6-2) allows for transversal feeder connec-
tions and for expansion-compensated coupling of enclosures such as busbars.
Note The cup springs of transport units with transversal erection modules are locked with the
locking sleeve, the nut and the washer. Release the locking only after filling of the gas
compartment with SF6 to the rated pressure (secure the loose washer (5) against
vibration).
Note When evacuating SF6 out of already filled gas compartments, make sure that the cup
springs are locked with the locking sleeve, the nut and the washer.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
B 11 12 13 14 15 16
14
1 − Screw 9 − Distance sleeve
2 − Transversal erection ring 10 − Insulator bolt
3 − Pressure sheet 11 − Washers
4 − Cup spring fixture 12 − Locking sleeve
5 − Loose washer 13 − Cup springs
6 − Nut 14 − Insertion piece
7 − Screw 15 − HF-Contact spring
8 − Threaded sleeve 16 − O-ring
Figure 2.6-2: Enclosure of Transversal Erection Module with Insulator

¤ Installation
Opening the Transversal Erection Module (Figure 2.6-2)

1. Tighten the locking sleeve (12) with the nut (6) and the washer (5) until
locked
2. Screw the threaded sleeve (8) all the way onto the screw (7)
3. Loosen the screw (1) and remove the cup spring fixture (4) completely
(transversal erection ring (2) and O-ring (16) lie loosely on the insertion
piece (14)). If necessary, the insulator bolt has to be unscrewed in direction
of arrow A to allow for removal of the cup spring fixture
4. Slide in the insertion piece (14) in direction of arrow B
Closing the Transversal Erection Module (Figure 2.6-2)

1. Slide out the insertion piece (14) in direction of arrow A
(make sure that the insertion piece and the O-rings fit properly)
2. Insert the HF-Contact spring (15) into the transversal erection ring (2) and
locate it with the pressure sheets (3)
3. Insert the cup spring fixture (4) (make sure that the transversal erection
ring (2), the HF-Contact spring (15) and the O-ring (16) fit properly)
4. Loosely fasten the cup spring fixture (4) with the screw (1)
5. Tighten the threaded sleeve (8) with the insulator bolt (10), make sure that
the insulator bolt (10) is inserted minimum 6 mm into the threaded sleeve
6. Tighten the screw (1) on the cup spring fixture (4)
7. Carry out necessary gas handling
8. Loosen the nut (6)
9. Counter the threaded sleeve (8) with the nut (6)
10. The loose washer (5) remains on the screw (7) and is to be secured against
vibration by means of cable binders

¤ Installation
2.7 Inductive Voltage Transformer

Inductive voltage transformers are measuring transformers in which the secondary

voltage for all practical purposes is proportional to and in phase with the primary
voltage. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the network voltage to be
measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective
devices. The primary and the secondary windings are galvanically seperated.
During installation the barrier insulator (2) of the voltage transformer must not be dis-
mounted, as the voltage transformer is already being shipped with a SF6 prefilling
(Figure 2.7-1). For the installation of the voltage transformer, a lifting device with a
minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg is required.
CAUTION The inductive voltage transformer (Figure 2.7-1) is shipped filled with SF6 at a pres-
sure of 150 kPa. Do not evacuate!
4 3
1 − Connection flange 3 − Gas fitting

2 − Barrier insulator 4 − Bursting disk
Figure 2.7-1: Voltage Transformer

¤ Installation
2.7.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector/Earthing

Switch
Figure 2.7-2 shows the connection of the voltage transformer to a feeder module with
integrated disconnector/earthing switch. The voltage transformer is connected in this
case to the GIS side.
Note If the voltage transformer shall be connected on the feeder side, the voltage transformer
has to be installed turned by 180°.
Installation of the Voltage Transformer to the GIS side

1. Connect the voltage transformer to the active parts of the disconnector/earth-
ing switch on the GIS side (3) (Figure 2.7-2)
2. Install the flange connection (contact sleeve (4) / voltage transformer connec-
tion (2)) on the barrier insulator of the voltage transformer using an adjusting
gauge
3. Place an O-ring (5) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the voltage
transformer
4. Lower the voltage transformer straight and carefully into the connection
flange (6) using a lifting device with a minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg
5. Make sure that the voltage transformer connection (3) smoothly slides into
the contact sleeve (4) without jamming; check correct fitting of the O-ring (5)
6. Bolt the voltage transformer flange and the connection flange (6) together
with the specified torque
5 1
2
6
1 − Barrier insulator 4 − Contact sleeve

(part of the voltage transformer) 5 − O-ring
2 − Voltage transformer connection 6 − Connection flange
3 − Voltage transformer connection on GIS side (part of the GIS)
Figure 2.7-2: Voltage Transformer (connection on the GIS side)

¤ Installation
Installation of the Voltage Transformer on the feeder side
Figure 2.7-3 shows the connection of the voltage transformer to the feeder module
with integrated disconnector/earthing switch on the feeder side.
1. Connect the voltage transformer to the active parts of the disconnector/earth-
ing switch on the feeder side (3) (Figure 2.7-3)
2. Install the flange connection (contact sleeve (4) / voltage transformer connec-
tion (2)) on the barrier insulator of the voltage transformer using an adjusting
gauge
transformer
5. Make sure that the voltage transformer connection (3) slides into the contact
sleeve (4) without jamming; check correct fitting of the O-ring (5)
with the specified torque
6 2 1
1 − Barrier insulator (part of the voltage transformer) 4 − Contact sleeve

2 − Voltage transformer connection 5 − O-ring
3 − Voltage transformer connection on feeder side 6 − Connection flange
Figure 2.7-3: Voltage Tranformer connection on feeder side

¤ Installation
2.7.2 Voltage Transformer on the end of a Busbar

Note The voltage transformer should be mounted on the end of the busbar fitted with a
transversal erection module (6) (Figure 2.7-4). If the voltage transformer has to be
installed on the opposite end of the busbar, an additional pipe module has to be inserted.
This is necessary, because the busbar conductors are fixed to the insulator of this busbar
end, and the insulator on the voltage transformer must not be dismounted.
Installation of the Voltage Transformer

1. Remove the end cap (7) from the busbar end (Figure 2.7-4)
2. Bolt the contacts (4) with three screws M12 (3) to the barrier insulator of the
voltage transformer (1)
transformer
4. Slide the voltage transformer straight and carefully onto the connection
flange of the transversal erection module (6) using a lifting device with a mini-
mum lifting capacity of 500 kg
5. Make sure that the conductors (2) smoothly slide into the contacts (4) without
jamming; check proper fitting of the O-ring (5)
6. Bolt the voltage transformer flange to the transversal erection module (6)
1 − Barrier insulator voltage transformer 5 − O-ring

2 − Conductor 6 − Transversal erection module
3 − Screw M12 7 − End cap
4 − Contacts
Figure 2.7-4: Connection of the Voltage Transformer to the Busbar

¤ Installation
2.7.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector/Earthing Switch

Installation of the Voltage Transformer
1. Install the contacts (6) with three screws M12 (7) to the barrier insulator (1)
(Figure 2.7-5)
2. Fix the conductors (5) with the clamp (3) and the screws M12 (2) to the con-
tacts
3. Place an O-ring (9) into the groove of the barrier insulator (1) of the voltage
transformer
5. Make sure that the conductors (5) smoothly slide into the plug contacts (4)
without jamming; check proper fitting of O-ring (9)
1
9
8
7
6 5 4 3 2
1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Conductor

(part of voltage transformer) 6 − Contacts
2 − Screw M12 7 − Screw M12
3 − Clamp 8 − Connection flange
4 − Plug contact 9 − O-ring
Figure 2.7-5: Voltage Transformer on the Feeder Module without
Disconnector / Earthing Switch

¤ Installation
2.8 Surge Arrester

The surge arrester (Figure 2.8-1) is shipped separately.
During installation the barrier insulator (5) of the surge arrester must not be dis-
mounted (Figure 2.8-1). For the installation of the surge arrester, a lifting device with a
minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg is required.
5 4 3 2 1
1 − Base plate 4 − Gas port

2 − Enclosure 5 − Barrier Insulator
3 − Bursting disk
Figure 2.8-1: Surge Arrester

¤ Installation
2.8.1 Feeder Module with integrated Disconnector / Earthing

Switch
Figure 2.8-2 shows the connection of the surge arrester to a feeder module with inte-
grated disconnector / earthing switch. The surge arrester is connnected in this case to
the GIS side.
Note If the surge arrester shall be connected on the feeder side, the surge arrester has to be
installed turned by 180°.
Installation of the Surge Arrester to the GIS side

1. Connect the surge arrester to the active parts of the disconnector / earthing
switch on the GIS side (3) (Figure 2.8-2)
2. Install the flange connection (contact sleeve (4) / surge arrester connec-
tion (2)) on the barrier insulator using an adjusting gauge
3. Place an O-Ring (5) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the surge
arrester
4. Lower the surge arrester straight and carefully into the connection flange (6)
using a lifting device with a minimum lifting capacity of 500 kg
5. Make sure that the surge arrester connection (3) smoothly slides into the
contact sleeve (4) without jamming; check the correct fitting of the o-ring (5)
6. Bolt the surge arrester flange and the connection flange (6) together
5 1
6 2
1 − Barrier insulator (part of the surge arrester) 4 − Contact sleeve

2 − Surge arrester connection 5 − O-ring
3 − Surge arrester connection on GIS side 6 − Connection flange (part of the GIS)
Figure 2.8-2: Surge Arrester (connection on the GIS side)

¤ Installation
Installation of the Surge Arrester on the feeder side
Figure 2.8-3 shows the connection of the surge arrester to the feeder module with
integrated disconnector / earthing switch.
1. Connect the surge arrester to the active parts of the disconnector / earthing
switch on the feeder side (3) (Figure 2.8-3)
2. Install the flange connection (contact sleeve (4) / surge arrester connection
(2)) on the barrier insulator of the surge arrester using an adjusting gauge
3. Place an O-ring (5) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the surge
arrester
5. Make sure that the surge arrester connection (3) slides into the contact
sleeve (4) without jamming; check correct fitting of the O-ring (5)
6. Bolt the surge arrester flange and the connection flange (6) together with the
specified torque
5
6 1
2
4
1 − Barrier insulator (part of the surge arrester) 4 − Contact sleeve

2 − Surge arrester connection 5 − O-ring
3 − Surge arrester connection on feeder side 6 − Connection flange
Figure 2.8-3: Surge Arrester connection on feeder side

¤ Installation
2.8.2 Surge Arrester on the end of a Busbar

Note The surge arrester should be mounted on the end of the busbar fitted with a transversal
erection module (6) (Figure 2.8-4). If the surge arrester has to be installed on the opposite
end of the busbar, an additional pipe module has to be inserted. This is necessary,
because the busbar conductors are fixed to the insulator of this busbar end, and the
insulator on the surge arrester must not be dismounted.
Installation of the Surge Arrester

1. Remove the end cap (7) from the busbar end (Figure 2.8-4)
2. Bolt the contacts (4) with three screws M12 (3) to the barrier insulator of the
surge arrester (1)
3. Place an O-ring (5) in the groove of the barrier insulator (1) on the surge
arrester
4. Slide the surge arrester straight and carefully onto the connection flange of
the transversal erection module (6) using a lifting device with a minimum
lifting capacity of 500 kg
5. Make sure that the conductors (2) smoothly slide into the contacts (4) without
jamming; check proper fitting of the O-ring (5)
6. Bolt the surge arrester flange to the transversal erection module (6)
1 − Barrier insulator surge arrester 5 − O-ring

2 − Conductor 6 − Transversal erection module
3 − Screw M12 7 − End cap
4 − Contacts
Figure 2.8-4: Connection of the Surge Arrester to the Busbar

¤ Installation
2.8.3 Feeder Module without Disconnector/Earthing Switch

Installation of the Surge Arrester
1. Install the contacts (6) with three screws M12 (7) to the barrier insulator (1)
(Figure 2.8-5)
2. Fix the conductors (5) with the clamp (3) and the screws M12 (2) to the
contacts
3. Place an O-ring (9) into the groove of the barrier insulator (1) of the surge
arrester
5. Make sure that the conductors (5) smoothly slide into the plug contacts (4)
without jamming; check proper fitting of O-ring (9)
6. Bolt the surge arrester flange and the connection flange (8) together
1
9
8
7
6 5 4 3 2
1 − Barrier insulator (part of surge arrester) 6 − Contacts

2 − Screw M12 7 − Screw M12
3 − Clamp 8 − Connection flange
4 − Plug contact 9 − O-ring
5 − Conductor
Figure 2.8-5: Surge Arrester on the Feeder Module without Disconnector / Earthing Switch

Content
3 ¤ Commissioning
Content
3.1 Tests prior to Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-1
3.1.1 Tools for On-Site Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.2 Inspection after Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-2
3.1.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors . 3.1-3
3.1.5 Check of Gas Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.6 Dew Point Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.7 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-3
3.1.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices 3.1-4
3.1.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1-4
3.1.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop . . . . . 3.1-5
3.2 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-1
3.2.1 Performance of the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-2
3.2.2 Calculation of the Test Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-3
3.2.3 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-5
3.2.3.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position 3.2-7
3.2.3.2 Connection to the Busbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.3 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-9
3.2.3.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End, Type EHSVS . . 3.2-10
3.2.4 HV Cable-Test at Cable End Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
3.2.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2-11
3.2.4.2 Carrying out the High Voltage Test at the Cable . . . . . . 3.2-11
3-1
¤ Commissioning
3.1 Tests prior to Commissioning

This document describes the basic procedures for testing of the GIS at site prior to
commissioning. These procedures are based on the following:
S IEC 62 271-203
S IEEE C37.122
S Experience from more than 3500 installed GIS bays
S Technical, commercial and practical aspects of the tests at site prior to
commissioning
In most cases the shipping units delivered to site consist of complete bays or large
assemblies. These shipping units are subject to a complete factory test prior to
delivery.
The purpose of the tests at site prior to commissioning is:

S To detect any rare possible damage or anomaly that may occur during trans-
port
S To test the complete GIS installation after final assembly at site
S To ensure uninterrupted operation in service
The sequence of tests described in the following subclauses represents our standard
sequence. For special conditions prevailing at site or practical reason this sequence
may be modified by agreement between manufacturer and user.
Note The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 have to be
documented in the site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680 in section
SF6 Inventory.
Note All documents required for the tests prior to commissioning are listed in the site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680.
1HDG 918 740 J en 19.08.2010 EXTMEHA 23.09.2010 CHSVOTH 3.1-1

¤ Commissioning
3.1.1 Tools for On-Site Tests

In addition to the test equipment recommended in Table 3.1-1 (extract), a standard
tool set is required.
Table 3.1-1: Recommended Test Equipment
Test Test Tool Manufacturer
Voltage Drop Micro-Ohmmeter, range 0 − 600 A Programma
Gas Tightness Leakage Detector L-780 a ISM
Dew Point Hygrometer DP19 MBW Elektronik AG
Gas Density Relays Gas Density Relay Tester SK509 DILO
Devices Metrahit 13S / 18S Gossen Metrawatt
Test Adapter ABB
Resonance-Test Set of variable frequency

Type WRV 1.5 / 460 A HIGHVOLT
High-Voltage Test of Test Voltage 460 kV (can be ordered
the Main Current Path Frequency Range 50 − 250 Hz through ABB:
Rated Current 1.5 A KB 15 min 1HDS112203R0001
1.0 A KB 60 min WZ-Nr. 37/77)
Rated Inductivity appr. 720 H
Capacitive Load Range 0.6 − 14 nF
Note Suitable test devices that are not listed above may be used alternatively.
3.1.2 Inspection after Transport

Check the GIS for completeness, obvious transport damages etc. well before com-
mencement of the installation.
Note A form for the transport inspection is included in chapter “Delivery” in document
1HDG 518 100 “Receiving Inspection”.
3.1.3 Measurement of Voltage Drop

All contact connections assembled at site are subject to a measurement of the voltage
drop.
The measurement of the voltage drop is performed on two different locations with
q 100 A supplied from a suitable battery or DC supply source. Both test locations are
connected to the test device. The actual measurement is effective on the connecting
lead (not on the connection to the measuring location).
The resistance is calculated using the following formula:
R+U
I in which: R = resistance
U = voltage drop
I = current
Note The default values are specified in chapter “3.1.10 Default Values for Measurement of
Voltage Drop”.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.4 Check of Gas Density Relays / Gas Density Sensors

The gas density relays / sensors are checked before their installation on the GIS.
Note The test of the gas density relays / sensors is to be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680 in section “Gas Density Relay” resp. “Gas Density
Sensor”.
3.1.5 Check of Gas Tightness

The following components shall be subjected to gas tightness test:
S All flange connections assembled at site
S All gas couplings and connections assembled at site
All other components are tested in the factory prior to delivery.

Note The test for gas tightness at site prior to commissioning is to be documented in the site
test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680.
3.1.6 Dew Point Measurement

The moisture content of the gas is measured in all gas compartments.
The dew point measurement is performed once the gas compartments have been
filled and pressurized with SF6. In order to allow an equalization between the residual
moisture of the GIS enclosure material and the dry SF6 filling, this measurement
should not be carried out immediately after the filling. The permissible values and the
procedures associated with the dew point measurement are listed in chapter “Gas
Insulated Switchgear” in document “Gas-Handling” 1HDG 518 005 and in document
“Sulphur Hexafluoride” 1HDG 518 006.
Note The dew point measurement prior to commissioning is to be documented in the site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680.
3.1.7 Visual Inspection

Note Check the continuity between the name plates on the equipment and the circuit diagram
and the respective gas scheme drawings. Details are included in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680:
− Earthing
− Voltage Transformer
− Current Transformer
− Surge Arrester
− Amount of filled SF6
Note The amount of filled SF6 and the amount of the remaining rest of SF6 have to be
documented in the site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680 in section
SF6 Inventory.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.8 Mechanical Functional Tests of the Switching Devices

All switching devices shall be subjected to a final mechanical functional test at site.
Details are included in the on-site test protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680:
− Circuit Breaker
− Disconnector / Earthing Switch
− Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity
CAUTION The circuit breaker shall only be operated if it is filled with SF6 at minimum operat-
ing pressure (min. 600 kPa) at least!
3.1.9 On-Site Test of the Local Control Cabinet

Note The test of the local control cabinet prior to commissioning is described in site test
protocol “Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680; the test shall be documented in the mentioned
protocol.

¤ Commissioning
3.1.10 Default Values for Measurement of Voltage Drop

In case of a new installation, the voltage drop is measured on complete shipping units
(Figure 3.1-1 − Figure 3.1-2). For measurement on individual modules please refer to
Figure 3.1-3 − Figure 3.1-20.
The measuring points shall be as close as possible to the cast-in contacts of the insu-
lators for all measurements. The figures shown in the following section are schematic
diagrams.
x
R p 240 
Figure 3.1-1: Coupling of two Double Busbar Feeders (2500 A)

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity is closed. The correct measuring
point is on the shorting bridge. The measuring point for busbar 1 and busbar 2 shall be
as close as possible to the cast-in contacts in the barrier insulator (Figure 3.1-2).
x
BB1 R p 120 
BB2 R p 120 
x x
BB1 Rp 92 
BB2 Rp 92 
500 mm 700 mm
R p 120  (BB1)
R p 120  (BB2)
x
Figure 3.1-2: Complete Bay (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
1m
x
R p 128 
(with 145 kV connection)
Figure 3.1-3: Feeder with SF6-Air Bushing, Pipe 1 m (2500 A)
R p 40 
x
x
x
R p 21 
x
x
700 mm 500 mm
R p 40 
Figure 3.1-4: Circuit Breaker, Double Busbar (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
R p 45 
x
x
R p 26 
x
x
700 mm 700 mm
R p 45 
Figure 3.1-5: Circuit Breaker with Double Busbar (2500 A)
x
R p 43 
700 mm
Figure 3.1-6: Circuit Breaker, Buscoupler or Sectionalizer (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
R p 48 (flange connection lengths 900)

R p 43 (flange connection lengths 700)
Figure 3.1-7: Circuit Breaker with flange for 3150 A busbar
R p 26  R p 26 
x x
R p 18 
Figure 3.1-8: Busbar with combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
R p 22  R p 21 
x x
R p 21  R p 10 
Figure 3.1-9: Tee Off with Disconnector Contact (2500 A)
R p 21  R p 18 
xx
x x
xx
R p 10  R p 27 
R p 21 
Figure 3.1-10: Disconnector / Earthing switch

¤ Commissioning
R p 20.5  (dismounted earthing guide rail)
x x
R p 21 
Figure 3.1-11: Additional Function Insulated Maintenance Earthing Switch
x x
R p 35 
Figure 3.1-12: Earthing switch with short circuit making capacity

¤ Commissioning
R p 23  R p 27 
xx
x x
xx
R p 23  R p 27 
R p 29 
R p 22 
Figure 3.1-13: Tee Off (2500 A)
Conductor Material Aluminium (Al): R p 16  (Rated Current p 2000 A)
Conductor Material Copper (Cu): R p 11  (Rated Current p 2500 A)
x x
Figure 3.1-14: Separate Current Transformer

¤ Commissioning
R p 6  R p 8,5  / m R p 6 
x x
x x
Figure 3.1-15: Pipe Module (2500 A)
R p 5  R p 15  / m R p 1 
x x x x
max. 1000
Figure 3.1-16: Pipe Module, short (2500 A)
R p 13 
x
x
R p 1 
R p 8 
x x
Figure 3.1-17: Angle Module 90 (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
x
x
x
R p 1 
x x R p 9 
R p 11 
Figure 3.1-18: Angle Module 30 (2500 A)
x x
x
R p 8  R p 30 
Figure 3.1-19: 145 kV SF6-Air Bushing (Composite Bushing), (2500 A)

¤ Commissioning
R p 6 
Figure 3.1-20: Cable Sealing End 3-phase Type C

¤ Commissioning
3.2 High Voltage Test of the Main Circuits

Note All pressures of the GIS and the recalculation to the ambient temperatures are described
in detail in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 004 “Gas
Pressures”.
Prior to commissioning the GIS is subject to a high voltage test. The test is performed
with an AC voltage and a test transformer of suitable size (Table 3.2-1 and
Table 3.2-2).
As an alternative, both, the GIS and the power cables, can be tested with a resonance
test set with variable frequency.
The aim of this test is to detect any dielectric irregularities. Such irregularities can
have their origin in incorrect assembly, transport damages, foreign bodies etc.
This test of one minute duration has been proven over many years of practical ap-
plication. The subsequent successful energizations of the tested GIS shows that this
test guarantees a safe and reliable operation of the GIS.
The high voltage test of the GIS is usually performed before the installation of the
power cables. In case the power cables have already been installed prior to the high
voltage test, they have to be disconnected for the duration of the test. The cables can
be disconnected from the GIS by opening the disconnector.
Once the power cables have been installed and connected to the GIS, they are high
voltage tested; usually this test is performed by the cable manufacturer.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.1 Performance of the Test

The high voltage test of the main circuits will be performed after all installation work
has been concluded. If a breakdown occurs, the test has to be repeated.
The AC test voltages are listed in Table 3.2-1.

Note The test is to be performed at filling pressure.
Note The high voltage commissioning test is to be documented in the site test protocol
“Commissioning” 1HDG 518 680. It must be performed in the following sequence:
1. Calculate the maximum number of GIS bays that can be simultaneously tested
using the values given in Table 3.2-1
2. Raise the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s up to the test voltage listed in
Table 3.2-1 and apply for one minute
3. Lower the test voltage at approximately 1 kV / s to zero
Table 3.2-1: Test Voltages
Rated Voltages acc. to IEC 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV
Power Frequency Voltage used for Factory Test

140 kV 230 kV 275 kV
(Duration of Application: 1 Minute)
Power Frequency Voltage used for On-Site Test

120 kV 200 kV 235 kV
(Duration of Application: 1 Minute)
Rated maximum voltages according to ANSI* 72.5 kV 123 kV 145 kV
Power frequency voltage at routine test

160 kV 215 kV 310 kV
(Test duration: 1 minute)
Power frequency voltage at site

128 kV 172 kV 248 kV
(Test duration: 1 minute)
*IEEE Std C37.122

¤ Commissioning
3.2.2 Calculation of the Test Burden

The required power of the test transformer depends on the capacitance of the GIS
modules (Table 3.2-2). The test burden of the GIS can be calculated by adding the
individual capacitances of these GIS modules. Test transformers are available within
the range of 45 kVA to 1300 kVA.
The test burden can be determined using the following formula:
Q = U2 x  x Cges
Q = test burden (power)
U = test voltage
w + 2·p·f
1000
f = frequency
Cges = sum of all the modules’ capacitances incl. insulators
The test burden is determined as an equation in units with:
f = 50 Hz: Q [VA] = U2 [kV] x 0,31 x Cges [nF]
f = 60 Hz: Q [VA] = U2 [kV] x 0,38 x Cges [nF]
Note If the test is performed with a resonance test set with variable frequency, the selected
frequency of the resonance test set has to be used in the equation above.
The capacitance C is determined by adding the individual capacitances of all the GIS
modules for the arrangement to be tested. The result obtained is the capacitance load
per phase with the other two phases being earthed through their connection to the
GIS enclosure.
Table 3.2-2: Capacitance per Module
Module Capacitance in nF
1 standard double busbar bay with cable connection, with-

0.7
out inductive voltage transformer
Disconnector / earthing switch * 0.04
Circuit breaker, closed * 0.14
Circuit breaker, open * 0.11
Current transformer * 0.03
T-section , cross module * 0.05
Busduct per linear m * 0.03
30- / 90-module * 0.05
Split-up module 0.03
Outdoor bushing, porcelain / composite (silicone) 0.3 / 0.03
Cable termination with conical insulator (without cable) * 0.15
Barrier insulator 0.025
Support insulator 0.01

¤ Commissioning
Module Capacitance in nF
Voltage transformer * 0.1
* without barrier and support insulators

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3 Possibilities for Connection of the Test Set

Usually a portable high voltage test set is being used (Figure 3.2-1). The test trans-
former (4) is connected to the phases to be tested by means of a test adapter (2) and
a flange adapter 735-520 (3). The phase to be tested can be selected on the test
adapter, while the other two phases are earthed.
Depending on the type and individual arrangement, the test adapter can be connected
either to the end of the busbar or to the voltage transformer flange position. Other ar-
rangements are possible as well.
3
1
2
1 − Variable transformer 3 − Flange adapter 735-520
2 − Test adapter 4 − Encapsulated test transformer
Figure 3.2-1: Encapsulated High Voltage Test Set
As an alternative, the test adapter (2) can be connected to an SF6-air test bushing (1).
This enables testing with a separate test transformer (Figure 3.2-2).
2
1
1 − SF6-air test bushing

2 − Test adapter
3 − Flange adapter 735-520
Figure 3.2-2: Test Adapter with SF6-Air Test Bushing

¤ Commissioning
5
6
4
3
1 2
8
9
10
1 − GIS 7 − HV test set (medium) TES 510

2 − Flange adapter 735-520 8 − Variable transformer
3 − Test adapter 9 − HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460
4 − SF6-air test bushing (resonance test set with control unit)
5 − Transition piece, size 1 10 − Transition piece, size 3
6 − HV test set (small) TES 230
Figure 3.2-3: Overview over the available High Voltage Test Sets
Table 3.2-3: Picture Title
Picture-Nr. Title Document No.
1 GIS project-specific
2 Flange adapter 735-520 GPFK 051 310 R90
3 Test adapter tool no. 37-32 (GPFK 051 310 R1) 1HDS 112 058 R0001
4 SF6-air test bushing (tool no. 37-55) GSXN 391 001 R0092
5 Transition piece, size 1 (scope of supply 37-25) GPFA 020 450 R0001
HV test set (small) TES 230

6 1HDS 112 205 R0001
(including variable transformer and peak voltmeter) (tool no. 37-25)
HV test set (medium) TES 510

7 1HDS 112 204 R0001
(including variable transformer and peak voltmeter) (tool no. 37-26)
8 Variable transformer (included in TES 230 and TES 510)
HV test set (large) WRV 1.5/460

9 1HDS 112 203 R0001
(including control unit and step-up transformer) (tool no. 37-77)
10 Transition piece, size 3 (scope of supply 37-26 and 37-77) GPFA 020 450 R0003

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3.1 Connection to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position
Without Power Cables

The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position (Figure 3.2-4). The
disconnector is closed. The power cables and the cable sealing ends are not con-
nected to the GIS.
Note If a EHSVS cable sealing end is mounted, the isolator of the sealing end may be included
in the test arrangement („3.2.3.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End, type EHSVS“).
Figure 3.2-4: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, without Power Cables

¤ Commissioning
With Power Cables

The test set is connected to the voltage transformer flange position (Figure 3.2-5). The
disconnector is open and the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity closed.
The power cables are connected to the GIS and earthed via the earthing switch with
short circuit making capacity.
Figure 3.2-5: Test Set connected to the Voltage Transformer Flange Position, with Power Cables
Note These connection possibilities are also valid for use of a test adapter with SF6-air test
bushing.

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3.2 Connection to the Busbar

The encapsulated test set is connected to the busbar (Figure 3.2-6). The power
cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the GIS.
Figure 3.2-6: Test Set connected to the Busbar
3.2.3.3 Connection to the Outdoor Bushing

If the GIS layout has a three-phase outdoor bushing connection to an overhead line or
a transformer (Figure 3.2-7), a separate test transformer can be connected to the
phases. During the test, the test voltage is applied to one phase while the other two
are earthed. The power cables and the cable sealing ends are not connected to the
GIS.
Figure 3.2-7: GIS with Outdoor Bushing

¤ Commissioning
3.2.3.4 GIS with Compact Cable Sealing End, Type EHSVS

During this test, the GIS and the cable plug-in sockets are high voltage tested. The
power cables are not inserted into the sockets.
High Voltage Test without Cables (Figure 3.2-8)

2. Establish pressure equalisation with atmosphere
3. Connect the test set to the GIS
4. Vent the N2 out of the cable sealing ends’ plug-in sockets (1) through the gas
fittings (2) on the covers
5. Check the earthing of the cover
6. Fill the plug-in sockets (1) with SF6 up to their filling pressure
7. Vent the disconnector (3)
8. Fill all gas compartments with SF6 up to their filling pressure
9. Close the disconnector (3)
10. Open earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
11. Carry out the high voltage test
Final Works after the High Voltage Test

12. Earth the GIS with the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
13. Evacuate the SF6 out of the disconnector (3)
14. Establish pressure equalisation with atmosphere
15. Dismount the test adapter
16. Re-establish the origin situation
17. Fill gas compartments with SF6
1
2
1 − Plug-in socket
2 − Gas fitting
3 − Disconnector
Figure 3.2-8: High Voltage Test for Plug-type Cable Sealing Ends, without Power Cable

¤ Commissioning
3.2.4 HV Cable-Test at Cable End Unit

HV Cable-Test at Cable End Unit with Plug-in Contact from Suedkabel
3.2.4.1 General
There are various testing possibilities for carrying out the cable test on HV cable with
extruded insulation.
The test voltages for cables with extruded insulation is given in IEC 60 840 “Power
cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages above 30 kV
(Um=36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um=170 kV); Test methods and requirements”.
Acc. to IEC it is recommanded to test the cable with a resonant frequency test device
with frequencies between 20 and 300 Hz. Please consult the cable terminal box
manufacturer about the procedure before carrying out a test of this nature.
The following applies in general: if the cable ends in a transformer or an enclosed

switchgear, an agreement on the test between the user, the manufacturer of the trans-
former or switchgear and the cable manufacturer is required. This agreement can
refer both to the testing facility and to the duration and level of the test voltage.
3.2.4.2 Carrying out the High Voltage Test at the Cable

The following situations are possible for the cable connection:
Cable connection from GIS to outdoor (Figure 3.2-9) or indoor terminal box
(Figure 3.2-10)
GIS
Figure 3.2-9: Cable connection GIS - outdoor connection
In this case, the cable test will take place using the test voltage input via either the
indoor or outdoor terminal box. The test is carried out as with conventional compact
terminal boxes (as shown in Figure 3.2-10 ).

¤ Commissioning
Figure 3.2-10: Conventional test situation
Cable connection from GIS to a transformer with fitted terminal boxes
Transformer
GIS
Figure 3.2-11: Cable connection GIS - transformer
The separate high voltage test of this cable connection can only be carried out from
the GIS side. On the transformer side, preparations in accordance with the specifica-
tions of the transformer manufacturer must be made.
Cable connection from GIS to GIS
GIS GIS
Figure 3.2-12: Cable connection GIS - GIS
The cable test can be carried out as with conventional compact terminal boxes (as
shown in Figure 3.2-10).

¤ Commissioning
Testing of the Cable separately from the GIS-Units
Another possibility for the test is to test the cable separately from the GIS units, as
long as there is a connecting terminal box on both sides. To do so, a special test
adapter, which can be ordered from the terminal box supplier, is required.
1 − Test cable
2 − Testing adapter
Figure 3.2-13: Testing the cables prior to “plugging in”
Alternatively, the cables can be tested prior to “plugging in” using a special test
adapter fitted directly to the cable; this test adapter (1, Figure 3.2-13) can be ordered
from the cable terminal box manufacturer.

Content
4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions
Content
4.1 Gas Density Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-1
4.1.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1-3
4.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-1
4.2.1 Design of the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-2
4.2.2 Operating Mechanism of the Interrupting Chamber . . . 4.2-2
4.2.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-3
4.2.4 Operating Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2-4
4.3 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components . . . . . . 4.3-1
4.3.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.2.1 Slow Switching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.2.2 Storage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-2
4.3.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3
4.3.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-3
4.3.4 Instructions for the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-4
4.3.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness . . . . . . 4.3-4
4.3.4.2 Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-5
4.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-6
4.3.6 Spare Parts, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.7 Tightening Torques for Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.8 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-7
4.3.9 Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3-8
4.4 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-1
4.4.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-2
4.4.1.1 Manually Operating the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . 4.4-2
4.4.1.2 Putting Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4-3
4.4.2 Technical Data Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism . 4.4-4
4-1
Content

4.5.2 Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-4
4.5.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present) . . . . . . . . . 4.5-5
4.5.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-9
4.5.2.3 Hand crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-11
4.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-12
4.5.3.1 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-12
4.5.3.3 Interlocking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-14
4.5.3.4 Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5-14
4.6.2 Design and Operation Principle of the Drive . . . . . . . . . 4.6-2
4.6.2.1 Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-3
4.6.2.2 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-5
4.6.3 Warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-6
4.6.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-7
4.6.4.1 Switching Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-7
4.6.4.3 Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-8
4.6.4.4 Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6-8
4.7 Separate Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7-1
4.8 Integrated Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8-1
4.9 Inductive Voltage Transformer VT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-1
4.9.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9-2
4.10 Surge Arrester Type AZ0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-1
4.10.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10-4
4.11 Anti-Condensation Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11-1
4-2
Content
4.12 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1

4.12.1 Design and Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1
4.12.2 Security Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1
4.12.3 Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-2
4.12.4 Capacitive Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-4
4.12.4.1 Sensor at Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-4
4.12.4.2 Sensor at Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-5
4.12.5 Detection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-5
4.12.5.1 Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.2 Light Emitting Diodes (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.3 LC-Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-6
4.12.5.4 Auxiliary Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.5.5 Test Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.5.6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.6 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-7
4.12.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.2 Wiring of Detection Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-8
4.12.7.3 Wiring of Sensor at Cable Sealing End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-9
4.12.7.4 Preparation of the Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-10
4.12.7.5 Wiring of Sensors at Barrier Insulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-11
4.12.8 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.1 Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.2 Threshold Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-12
4.12.8.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.9 Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-13
4.12.10 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-15
4-3
Content
4.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1

4.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1
4.13.1.2 Integrated control cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-2
4.13.1.3 Separate control cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-5
4.13.1.4 Variant for indoor application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-7
4.13.1.5 Variant for outdoor application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-7
4.13.2 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-8
4.13.3 Power Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-9
4.13.4 Heat Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-12
4.13.5 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.2 Intermediate Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.3 Condition of Switchgear Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-15
4.13.5.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-16
4.13.5.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-16
4.13.6 Conventional Bay Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-17
4.13.6.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-17
4.13.6.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control . . . . . 4.13-22
4.13.7 Control System REF542plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-24
4.13.7.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-24
4.13.8 Control System REC670 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-34
4.13.8.1 Function List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-34
4-4
¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions
4.1 Gas Density Relay

1 5 8
6 4 7
2
1 − Tendency indication 6 − Metal bellows

2 − Cabel connection 7 − Ventilation membrane
3 − Screw terminal 8 − Micro switch
4 − Compartment with reference gas 9 − Alternative cable outlet
5 − Gas compartment
Figure 4.1-1: Gas Density Relay
4.1.1 Design and Operating Principle

If the gas density falls below a predefined value, the gas density relay generates
a warning signal consisting of two stages.
The gas density relay provided for the gas circuit breaker compartment has three con-
tacts (1 x warning-stage 1, 2 x blocking-phase 2), which are directly conducted to the
operating mechanism cabinet of the circuit breaker, where they are processed.
The gas density relays provided for the other gas compartments of the GIS have three
contacts as well. Normally, two of these, namely those inside the control box of the
GIS, can be used to indicate warning signals.
(1 x warning-stage 1, 1 x collective indication-stage 2)
Measuring principle
The gas density to be supervised in the gas compartment (5) is continuously com-
pared with the gas density of an identical gas in the reference volume (4)
(Figure 4.1-1). Since the gas in both volumes has the same temperature, the densities
can be compared through a comparison of the pressures.
The differential pressure between the two gas volumes (4) and (5) moves the metal
bellows (6). This movement is transferred through the operating rod to the micro
switch (8). The micro switch (8) are electrically connected with the screw terminal (3)
and release at pressure drop the respective signal. The terminal (3) can be mounted
and dismounted without any tools.
1HDG 518 418 D en 19.08.2010 EXTMEHA 15.12.2010 CHSVOTH 4.1-1

Tendency Indication
The gas density relay has a tendency indication. From this display the measured
range and an indication of the actual pressure value can be read from a scale. The
switching points are marked with colour gradients (green/yellow, yelow/red) on the
scale. The coloured ranges signify:
Green: Gas pressure is OK

Yellow: Gas pressure is dropped
Red: Gas pressure is too low
The density relays are designed that tendency indication and micro switch work inde-
pendently from each other.
Note All pressures of the GIS and the recalculation to the ambient temperatures are described
in detail in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 004 “Filling
Pressures”.

4.1.2 Technical Data

Table 4.1-1: Gas Density Relay
Rated Values
Manufacturer Trafag AG, Switzerland
Measuring principle − Reference gas measurement
Indicator mechanism − Stainless steel, aluminium
Enclosure material − AlSi10Mg
Pressure range kPa 0 up to 1000 (pre-calibrated)
Ambient temperature C −40 up to +80
Switching point tolerance kPa +20
Number of switching points − up to 3
Accuracy of indication kPa ± 10
Leckage rate of the reference gas vol-

kPa / year t 0,5
ume
Tensioning torque for screw cap Nm 50
Weight g appr. 530
Maintenance − none
Degree of protection − IP 65
Outdoor suitability − yes
Electrical connection − Screw terminal
Table 4.1-2: Switching Capacity
Operating voltage V 250 (AC) 250 (DC) 220 (DC) 110 (DC) 24 (DC)
Switching capacity of the

A 10,0 0,1 0,25 0,5 2
micro switch (resistive)

4.2 Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is equipped with two or three identical connection flanges
(Figure 4.2-1). All other available GIS modules can be directly connected to these
flanges. This design allows for exceptionally compact and hence very economic
switchgear installations.
6
1 2 3 1
1 − Barrier insulator 5 − Drive plate

2 − Conductor 6 − Rotary bushing
3 − Current transformer 7 − Operating mechanism
4 − Interrupting chamber
Figure 4.2-1: Schematic drawing: Circuit Breaker with three Flanges
The circuit breaker requires extremely little maintenance. It works as a single-pressure

self blast breaker with one interrupting chamber for each pole. An increase of pres-
sure in the heat-up volume generates the gas flow required for arc extinction and re-
stabilization during a breaking operation.
1HDG 918 750 G en 13.03.2009 EXTMEHA 26.05.2009 CHSGRKU 4.2-1

The circuit breaker operating mechanism is a closed unit in itself. It can be easily dis-
mounted from the circuit breaker for maintenance purposes and does not require any
adjustments after reinstallation.
4.2.1 Design of the Circuit Breaker

The current transformers (3) are integrated into the circuit breaker compartment.
The circuit breaker compartment is separated from the rest of the GIS bay by means
of barrier insulators (1). The interrupting chambers (4) are installed in series next to
each other and connected to the barrier insulators (1) by means of conductors (2).
In the open position, the connectors of the busbars are separated from the conductors
(2) by the chamber insulator (Figure 4.2-1).
The energy necessary for operation of the circuit breaker is generated by the operat-
ing mechanism (7) and transmitted through the rotary bushing (6) and a operating rod
onto the interrupting chambers (4) (Figure 4.2-1).
Once the operating mechanism (7) and the drive plate (5) have been dismounted, the
interrupting chambers (4) can be removed, e. g. for maintenance purposes
(Figure 4.2-1).
4.2.2 Operating Mechanism of the Interrupting Chamber

Closing Operation:
During a closing operation the circuit breaker operating mechanism moves the operat-
ing rod (1). This operating rod (1) in turn moves parts of the interrupting chamber (the
insulating nozzle (8), the auxiliary nozzle (6) and the blast piston (2)) towards the fixed
contact (9). The pre-ignition takes place on the arcing contacts (5), so that the main
current contacts (4) close practically without current (Figure 4.2-2).
Opening Operation:
An opening operation works in the opposite sequence with the main contacts (4)
being separated first, followed by the arcing contacts (5) (Figure 4.2-2).
The thermal energy of the arc increases the pressure in the heat-up volume (3). When
the arcing contacts open, a gas flow through the auxiliary (6) and the insulating nozzle
(8) is generated. This gas flow cools the arc by intensive radial blowing and leads to
its extinction in the natural current zero (Figure 4.2-2).
9 5 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 − Operating rod 4 − Main contacts 7 − Chamber insulator

2 − Blast piston 5 − Arcing contacts 8 − Insulating nozzle
3 − Heat-up chamber 6 − Auxiliary nozzle 9 − Fixed contact
Figure 4.2-2: Interrupting Chamber (in OFF Position)


Table 4.2-1: Circuit Breaker
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/126 132/145
Lightning impulse withstand voltage to earth kV 325 550 650
Power frequency withstand voltage to earth kV 140 230 275
Frequency Hz 50
Current A 1250 / 1600 / 2000 / 2500
Peak current (at 31.5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100
Short-time withstand current kA 31.5 / 40
Short circuit duration s 3
Opening time (tOPEN) ms 22 − 38
Breaking time (tOPEN + tARC max. ) ms 43 − 59
Closing time (tCLOSE) ms 43 − 65
Operating sequence - O − 0.3 sec − CO − 3 min − CO
Short time power frequency withstand voltage

kV 2
auxiliary circuits
Min. functional pressure SF6 / filling pressure

kPa 600 / 700
(at 20°C)
Weight of SF6 filling kg 37
Weight complete with operating mechanism

kg 886
(without integrated current transformer and SF6)
Table 4.2-2: Guaranteed Values in accordance with IEC 62271-100

at rated voltage Un = 145 kV and IK = 40 kA
Test I RRRV Uc t2 / (t3)

kA KV/ms kV ms
Terminal fault, test duty:
− T 10 4 6.0 272 45
− T 30 12 5.0 266 225
− T 60 24 3.0 266 88
− T 100s 40 2.0 249 267
− T 100a 40 2.0 249 267
Out of phase condition (OoP) 10 1.67 370 534
Short-line fault L75 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)
− source side 30 2.0 166 177
− line side 6.0
Short-line fault L90 / 50 Hz (Zw=450W)

− source side 36 2.0 166 177
− line side 7.2
Capacitive currents
− overhead line 50 A
− cable 160 A

4.2.4 Operating Diagrams

The given tolerances for the switching times are valid for all operating conditions as
far as supply voltages and spring charging status of the operating mechanism are
concerned (Figure 4.2-3). The maximum permissible operating time difference be-
tween the three poles is tCLOSE and tOPEN v 3 ms.
Note For CO-operation with a continuously active OPEN command a minimum stroke of the
chamber of 105 mm is permissible.
OPEN CLOSE Pulse on

CLOSE
solenoid
Contact making
(arcing contact)
tCLOSE
Pulse on
OPEN
solenoid
tOPEN
t10−19
Contact separation
(arcing contact)
Chamber stroke (mm)
OPEN Timing of auxiliary switch contacts CLOSE

Operating angle 105°
Contacts 01 − 182
10±5°
Contacts 83 − 184
95±5°
Contacts 05 − 06
20±5°
Contacts 10 − 19
20±5° 20±5°
Main contact
* The contact making of the contacts 01 − 182 is adjusted to 10±5° for circuit breaker
end position CLOSE
Figure 4.2-3: Operating Diagram Circuit Breaker (schematic drawing)

4.3 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism Type HMB

4.3.1 Modules of Operating Mechanism Components
The modular design and the main components of the operating mechanism type
HMB:
The modules are:

S Charging module
S Storage module
S Working module
S Control module
S Monitoring module
The technical concept of the circuit breaker operating mechanism achieves a compact
design by combining the mechanical energy storage in disc springs and the hydraulic
operating and control principles.
The force of the disc spring assembly acts on a storage piston. On the storage piston,
the mechanical energy values spring force and spring travel are converted to the hy-
draulic energy values pressure and volume. The hydraulic power transmission (oil col-
umn) between the high-pressure store and the operating cylinders serves as a
quickly switching changeover variator for the CLOSE- and OPEN-operation and be-
sides it enables a simple setting of the switching speeds by means of the throttle
screws.
The operating mechanism control and the energy transmission are based on the
field-proven structural elements of the hydraulic operating technology such as the
high-pressure hydraulic pump, storage piston, changeover valves as well as an oper-
ating piston with an integrated hydraulic end position damping.
For the HMB circuit-breaker operating mechanism, an easy-to-install and service-

friendly, modular design has been chosen, integrating the hydraulic control and oper-
ating functions in aluminium modules. The circuit breaker operating mechanism do not
have any hydraulic pipework. All modules are interconnected by means of flanges in a
modular design.
1HDG 518 425 D en 19.04.2005 EXTMEWE 26.04.2005 CHSVOTH 4.3-1

4.3.2 Commissioning
The commissioning protocols of the circuit-breaker concerning the operating mechan-
ism shall be observed. Prior to the commissioning, visual checks according to the
commissioning protocols shall be performed.
4.3.2.1 Slow Switching Operations

Slow switching operations do not represent any in-service operations. If nevertheless
slow switching operations must be performed, they shall only be performed by person-
nel authorized for this.
4.3.2.2 Storage Module

The pump motor of the operating mechanism has been designed for a short-time
operation and is not suitable for continuous operation. In order to prevent overheating,
the motor may only be charged with 20 CO-operations per hour.
The collector and the carbon brushes shall be checked after approx. 8 years. The
carbon brushes are wear parts to replace when their length has diminished below
11 mm (Figure 4.3-1).
1 1
1
w11
1 − Carbon brushes
2 − Pump motor
Figure 4.3-1: Pump motor

4.3.3 Optional Adjusting Procedures

4.3.3.1 Adjusting the Operating Speeds
The operating speeds of the operating mechanism are preset already in the factory.
A resetting or readjustment is only necessary in exceptional cases.
The operating speeds for the CLOSE- and OPEN-operation can be adjusted indepen-
dently of each other with the throttle screws available on the operating mechanism.
The operating speeds may only be adjusted when the disc spring assembly is
untensioned. For this release the pressure release screw and untension the disc
spring assembly slowly by lowering the system pressure.
Loosen the locknut (2) of the throttle screw (1) and adjust the operating speed by turn-
ing the throttle screw (Figure 4.3-2). The operating speed diminishes when the throttle
screw (1) is turned right and increases when it is turned left.
After the adjustment retighten the locknut (2).

2
1 − Throttle screw
2 − Locknut
Figure 4.3-2: Throttle scews

4.3.4 Instructions for the Operation

The Chapter below contains instructions for the triggering and the operation of the
circuit breaker operating mechanism.
4.3.4.1 Pump Starts and Checks for Internal Tightness

The gaskets and valves used in the hydraulic system provide maximum technical
tightness. Minimum leakages on metallic sealing seats may cause minimum losses of
spring tension, which are compensated by automatic pump starts.
Different operating mechanism − also from one delivery − may show statistically
caused different amounts of pump starts per day. This affects in no way the life cycle
of the operating mechanism and represents no defect.
Up to 10 pump starts per day are permissible, even when the breaker is not operated.
With more than 10 pump starts per day the operating mechanism shall be monitored.
Note Upon more than 20 pump starts per day the manufacturer shall be contacted.
Please find our contact address in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction”
in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 007 “Contact”.
When determining the pump start numbers the pump starts caused by switching oper-
ations (CLOSE or OPEN) shall be deducted from the total number of the pump starts.
All specifications refer to the monthly avarage.
The leak test shall be done during a period of at least eight hours in the operating
positions CLOSE and OPEN. The test procedure is to bring the breaker into the corre-
sponding position and to tension the disc spring assembly; to prevent an automatic
pump start by disconnecting the motor supply conductor or by switching off the minia-
ture circuit-breaker in the motor circuit.
The following data shall be recorded in the test protocol:
− Time
− Difference of the spring travel (Measure changes as per Figure 4.3-3)
The spring tension may diminish by 30 mm per 24 hours
(with switched-off pump motor).
HMB-1 and HMB-2 HMB-1S
Figure 4.3-3: Measuring the Internal Tightness

4.3.4.2 Oil Level

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are filled in the factory with a hydraulic oil
quantity comprising an oil reserve, too. If the hydraulic oil is visible in the oil gauge
glass with a fully tensioned disc spring assembly there is enough hydraulic oil avail-
able to perform the switching operations (Figure 4.3-4).
Used Oil brand

See 4.3.8 Utilities.
A too low oil level can be corrected by refilling via the low-pressure connector.
Note Only use filtered oil (purity level ISO 4406-13/10) for filling.
max. = middle
min. = visible
Figure 4.3-4: Oil Level in the Oil Gauge Glass in Mounting Position,
Operating Mechanism Tensioned

4.3.5 Checks
The operating mechanism operates to a large extent maintenance-free. Occasional
checks are however recommended and serve to maintain its dependability.
Table 4.3-1 gives an overview of all necessary maintenance actions.

Table 4.3-1: Servicing and Maintenance Checks
Check Maintenance
Before commis- During contact

sioning, after inspections on
Function to check Ocassionally Every 8 years
maintenance the circuit-
work breaker
Oil level check check check check
Carbon brushes *) check − check check
Collector − − check check
Wiring check − check check
Terminals − − check check
Auxiliary switch − − check check
Auxiliary switch − − check lubricate **)

kinematic system
Charging time − − check check
Tightness check check check check
*) Prior to commissioning, check the carbon brushes for seat.

Replace the carbon brushes if their length v 11 mm.
**) Relubricate the openings in the auxiliary switch straps after 5000 operating cycles
with special grease NBT 400 107 P1.
WARNING! The disk spring column is mechanically precharged with high tension forces.
Disassembly of disk spring is only permitted by authorized personnel according
to ABB procedure and safety regulation.

4.3.6 Spare Parts, General

The circuit breaker operating mechanism are to a large extent wear-free. The manu-
facturer does not recommend any stocking of spare parts. Upon an express request of
the user spare parts kits
S seals
S electrical spare parts
S hydraulic spare parts
can be supplied; the spare parts should be replaced only by specialists of the supplier.
When ordering spare parts, read the serial and ident. nos. of the operating
mechanism off the nameplate and communicate them.
4.3.7 Tightening Torques for Screws

As far as no other values have been indicated in the present Instructions, the tighten-
ing torques given in the below table shall apply.
Prior to the mounting, slightly lubricate-grease the screws ( 0,14).
Thread ( mm) Steel screw Steel screw Thread or

galvanized 8.8 stainless Thread insert
Thread in steel A2-70 or A4-70 in aluminium
Thread in steel
Nm Nm Nm
M6 10 8 6
M8 25 20 14
M10 49 38 26
M12 86 67 45
M16 210 148 100
4.3.8 Utilities
The utilities necessary for maintenance have been listed and approved below.
Hydraulic oil Esso Univis HVI 13 (Manufacturer: Esso AG)
ABB Designation:
Hydraulic oil bundle 1 Ltr. 1HDH 114 000 R0001
Hydraulic oil bundle 5 Ltr. 1HDH 114 000 R0005
Lubricating grease Lubricating grease NBT 400 107 P1

4.3.9 Cleaning agents

Material Cleaning agent
Aluminium, steel Rivolta MTX Forte (preferably),

(varnished, anodised, untreated) Alcohol 99, Isopropanol
sealings, o-rings (degree of purity min. 99%)
Housing
(connecting housing, cover half (GFK), Water or soap sud (0,5%)
bottom plate)
If using other than the mentioned above cleaning agents is to make sure that the
structure of the surface is not affected or damaged.

4.4 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1

5
6
10 3 4
11
1
15
12
14 X
View X
Throttle screw OPEN

13
Throttle screw CLOSE
1 − Operating piston (working module) (pressure gauge conn.)

2 − Pump motor 10 −
Oil drain valve
3 − Storage unit (storage module) 11 −
Low pressure tank
4 − Disk spring assembly 12 −
Oil gauge glass
5 − Low pressure connector 13 −
Change over valve (control module)
6 − Spring tension indicator 14 −
Spring travel switch (monitoring mod-
7 − Pressure release screw ule)
8 − Pump unit (charging module) 15 − Close position interlock (optional)
9 − High pressure connector
Figure 4.4-1: Modular design and main components
1HDG 918 753 E en 07.03.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 4.4-1

4.4.1 Commissioning
The commissioning protocols of the circuit-breaker concerning the operating mechan-
ism shall be observed. Prior to the commissioning, visual checks according to the
commissioning protocols shall be performed.
All adjustments are already factory-made and -fixed. Readjustments can be therefore
left out during the commissioning. At the commissioning, the disc spring assembly of
the operating mechanism shall be tensioned and the operating mechanism coupled
with the circuit-breaker shall be manually switched on and off several times. The
monitoring functions of the spring travel switch and the auxiliary switch shall be
checked.
Prior to switching on the pump motor, the changeover valve shall be switched to the
OPEN position. For this press the rubber cap of the OPEN-solenoid with your thumb.
Thereby it is prevented that the changeover valve stands in an intermediate position
while the operating mechanism is unpressurized and the disc spring assembly cannot
be tensioned (pressure cannot be built up).
Functional tests shall be performed after the completion of the commissioning work
and immediately before the start of the regular operation and after maintenance work
as well. Functional tests may only be performed when the circuit-breaker is discon-
nected from the high voltage system, there is at least blocking pressure of the SF6 gas
and the disc springs are tensioned.
4.4.1.1 Manually Operating the Operating Mechanism

It is possible to trigger the circuit-breaker by hand via the hand plungers of the
changeover valve (Figure 4.4-2). A manual triggering serves only to check the reliabil-
ity performance in case of servicing or maintenance work and does not represent any
normal operational case.
WARNING! In this case the electrical interlocks are cancelled. The warning and danger instruc-
tions given in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction” in chapter
“Operating Instructions” in document “1HDG 518 020 Safety Instructions” shall
be imperatively observed.
According to IEC 62271-100 manual triggering shall be used only for maintenance
and emergency operation on a dead circuit.
2 1
1 − CLOSE-solenoid
2 − OPEN-solenoid
Figure 4.4-2: Changeover Valve

4.4.1.2 Putting Out of Service

When doing maintenance work on the operating mechanism, the circuit-breaker shall
be put out of service.
WARNING! An automatic start of the pump motor shall be prevented by disconnecting the
electrical motor connectors or switching off the miniature circuit-breaker.
After the locknut has been loosened, turn the pressure release screw slowly clockwise
in order to untension the disc spring assembly.
CAUTION With opened housing in the area of the disk spring assembly and movable parts
the risk of squashing is given.
1 − Pressure release screw

2 − Disc spring assembly
Figure 4.4-3: Releasing the Disk Spring Assembly

4.4.2 Technical Data Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Table 4.4-1: VAC Universal Motor
Motor ratings V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance % + 10 / − 15
Motor power W 600
Motor start-up current A 40 25
Continuous current A 9 4.5
Operating mode − short-time operation

ED = 10%
Table 4.4-2: VDC Compound Motor
Motor ratings V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance % + 10 / − 15
Motor power W 600
Motor start-up current A 30 20
Continuous current A 6 3
Operating mode − short-time operation

ED = 10%
Table 4.4-3: Charging Times
Rated Values V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Operating sequence − O-CO
Charging times, tolerance % ± 15
Closing s 5
Opening s 6
CLOSE- / OPEN-operation s 11
OPEN- / CLOSE- / OPEN-operation s 17
The whole store s 30

Table 4.4-4: Opening and Closing Coils
Coil ratings V 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance ON-solenoid % + 10 / − 15
Tolerance OFF-solenoid % + 10 / − 30
Solenoid power W 300
Number of ON-solenoids − 1
Number of OFF-solenoids − 2
Note If the operating mechanism is equipped with an anti-condensation heater, it is vented.

The technical data of the heater are listed in chapter “Equipment and Functional
Descriptions” in document 1HDG 518 450 “Anti-condensation Heater”.
Table 4.4-5: Auxiliary Switch
Auxiliary Switch ratings
Insulation voltage V AC 380 / DC 450
Thermal current A 25
Short circuit withstand capability A 1000 (0,3 s)
Switching capacity 110 ... 125 VDC A 6 (L/R = 20 ms)
Switching capacity 220 ... 250 VDC A 4 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − Plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − wiping contacts
Contacts − silver plated, self cleaning
Number of contacts (24 poles) −

− Normally closed 11 (6)
− Normally open 11 (7)
− Wipers 1
− Leading normally open 1

4.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch
View x
Figure 4.5-1: Combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch with Operating Mechanism
4.5.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device

The disconnector and the earthing switch are combined in one switching device
(Figure 4.5-1). The moving contacts (4), Figure 4.5-2 can be moved into the three fol-
lowing positions for the disconnector respectively the earthing switch:
− Disconnector closed
− Disconnector open / Earthing switch open (neutral position, Figure 4.5-2)
− Earthing switch closed
1 − Barrier Insulator 4 − Moving Contact

2 − Conductor 5 − Counter Contact for Disconnector
3 − Counter Contact for Earthing Switch
Figure 4.5-2: Disconnector / Earthing Switch integrated in the Busbar module (neutral position)
1HDG 918 747 H en 18.05.2010 EXTMEHA 18.05.2010 CHSFJKO 4.5-1

The conductors (2) are fixed at the barrier insulator (1) (alternatively at a support insu-
lator) in such a way that the operating rod for the moving contacts (4) is aligned.
The fixed contacts for the earthing switch (3) respectively the disconnector (5) are lo-
cated opposite to the corresponding position of the moving contact (Figure 4.5-2).
The operating mechanism (Figure 4.5-5) is mounted outside the gas compartment
and operates the moving contacts ((4), Figure 4.5-2) via the insulating rods, see
Figure 4.5-3.
Insulating rod
Figure 4.5-3: Insulating Rod
In combination with the various available conductor and enclosure arrangements this
layout can be used to realize the following function modules:
− Busbar with integrated disconnector / earthing switch, as shown in
Figure 4.5-2
− Cable termination with integrated disconnector / earthing switch, Figure 4.5-4
− Connection piece with integrated disconnector / earthing switch

Cable Termination with integrated Disconnector / Earthing Switch
The cable termination with integrated disconnector / earthing switch allows contacting
of the voltage transformer on either side of the disconnector. Figure 4.5-4 shows the
situation that the voltage transformer is connected to the circuit breaker side. The HV
test set can be connected to the same contacts, as well.
voltage transformer side
1 2
4
circuit
5 breaker
side
1 − Voltage Transformer Contact 4 − Conductor

(circuit breaker side) 5 − Counter Contact for Disconnector
2 − Counter Contact for Earthing Switch 6 − Barrier Insulator
3 − Moving Contact
Figure 4.5-4: Cable Termination with integrated Disconnector/Earthing Switch

4.5.2 Operating Mechanism
7 5 8 6 9
3
Earthingswitch
1
Disconnector
1 − Interlocking Switch 4 − Auxiliary Contacts 8 − Drive Rod

2 − Rod for Emergency 5 − Cam Disk 9 − Carrier
Manual Operation 6 − Plug Connections 10 − Operating
3 − Position Indicator 7 − Threaded Spindle Mechanism Motor
Figure 4.5-5: Operating Mechanism of the combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch
The operating mechanism is normally motor-operated. Manual operation is possible in

emergencies. The rotating movement of the operating mechanism is transmitted
through a threaded spindle (7) and a cam disk (5) via the drive rod (8) onto the mov-
ing contacts (Figure 4.5-5).
The combined disconnector / earthing switch has two drive motors (10), one for the
disconnector and one for the earthing switch. For manual emergency operation a
handcrank can be attached to the rod (2) that operates the threaded spindle (7).
The cam disk (5) is located between the threaded spindle (7) and the drive rod (8) of
the contact blades and is actuated by a carrier (9). The cam disk (5) locks the device
in the following end positions:
− Disconnector closed
− Disconnector open / Earthing switch open (neutral position)
− Earthing switch closed

The cam disk (5) has the following functions (Figure 4.5-5):
− Torque-free start-up of the operating mechanism
− End position locking
− End positioning
The motor current is interrupted by a limit switch.
When the device is manually operated, the interlocking switch (1) automatically dis-
connects the motor circuit.
The auxiliary contacts (4) and the position indicator (3) are linked to the operating
rod (8).
All electrical connections are separated for the disconnector and the earthing switch
and are connected with coded plug connections (6).
4.5.2.1 Manual Operation (Control Voltage Present)
WARNING! With present control voltage the system is supervised.

Without control voltage the interlocking conditions are not controlled. Therefore,
a secure operation isn’t anymore made sure. Because this case of operation can
be dangerous to life or physical condition (i.E. switching short-circuit), is the oper-
ation without control voltage allowed only for specially trained personal and can
be carried out only with special tools.
Note For manual operation all interlocking conditions (“4.5.2.2 Locking”) have to be fulfilled.
The device has to be unlocked.
In emergencies the disconnector and the earthing switch can be operated locally di-
rectly on the device by means of a handcrank. As soon as the handcrank is inserted,
the motor circuit is automatically interrupted.
For manual operation of the disconnector / earthing switch the front cover has to be
removed from the operating mechanism (Figure 4.5-7). The front cover is secured
with 4 captive screws M6 (4 Nm).
1 2
1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 4.5-6: Operating Mechanism with Cover, Switching Contact in neutral Position

1 2
1 − Position indicator disconnector

2 − Position indicator earthing switch
Figure 4.5-7: Operating Mechanism after removal of its Cover, Switching Contact in neutral
Position
Switching Positions of Interlocking Slider

3 2 1 1 2 3
1 − Local manual control (hand crank): Local control with hand crank possible
2 − Interlock (electrically switchable) = Default setting: Local and remote control possible,
control with hand crank not possible
3 − Mechanically and electrically blocked
Figure 4.5-8: Switching Positions of Interlocking Slider
Possible Combinations of Positions
Disconnector ON Earthing switch ON
Disconnector OFF Earthing switch OFF

Manual Operation of the Disconnector (Figure 4.5-9)
3 1 2 4,5
1 − Locking bolt 4 − Cover

2 − Interlocking slider 5 − Blocking solenoid
3 − Opening (not shown, behind 4)
Figure 4.5-9: Operating Elements Disconnector (front view)
Precondition: Neutral Position

1. The earthing switch must be open
2. Optional: Remove padlock (if fitted), locking bolt retracts
interlocking slider is in middle position
3. Move interlocking slider (2) in direction switching position “local manual con-
trol” until mechanical resistance
4. In case of existing control voltage:
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the oper-
ating personal for remote control operation for the further moving of the inter-
locking slider
WARNING! In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is allowed only for specially
trained personal and can be carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a) Remove cover (4) with tool
b) Unlock blocking solenoid (5) by pressing and hold
c) Move interlocking slider (2) on position “local manual control”
5. After release for the further moving move interlocking slider (2) until mechan-
ical end stop for releasing the hand crank opening (3) completely
6. Insert hand crank in opening (3)
7. Switch disconnector with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel
9. Remove hand crank
10. Tighten interlocking slider (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm

Operation Earthing Switch (Figure 4.5-10)
4,5 2 1 3
6 6
1 − Locking bolt 4 − Cover

2 − Interlocking slider 5 − Blocking solenoid (not shown, behind 4)
3 − Opening 6 − Padlock
Figure 4.5-10: Operating Elements Earthing Switch (front view)

1. The disconnector must be open
(otherwise bring the disconnector into the OFF position first)
2. Optional: Remove padlock (6) (if fitted), locking bolt retracts (Figure 4.5-10)
3. Move interlocking slider (2) in direction switching position “local manual con-
trol” until mechanical resistance
As soon as mechanical resistance is reached, wait for releasing by the oper-
ating personal for remote control operation for the further moving of the inter-
locking slider
WARNING! In case of breakdown of control voltage the operation is allowed only for specially
trained personal and can be carried out only with special tools:
As soon as resistance is reached:
a) Remove cover (4) with tool
c) Move interlocking slider (2) on position “local manual control”
5. After release for the further moving move interlocking slider (2) until mechan-
ical end stop for releasing the hand crank opening (3) completely
7. Switch earthing switch with hand crank ON or OFF
8. Turn hand crank until free-wheel


10. Tighten interlocking slider (2) and bring into neutral position
11. Pull locking bolt (1) and optional: Fit padlock
12. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the cover (4) back again
13. Put the front cover back in place again and tighten the 4 screws with 4 Nm
4.5.2.2 Locking
It is possible to lock the disconnector/earthing switch electrically and mechanically
both, in the open and in the closed position.
In order to lock the disconnector/earthing switch, the cover must be removed from the
operating mechanism (Figure 4.5-7).
Note After locking the device it can no longer be operated remotely or manually with the
handcrank.
Disconnector Earthing switch
1 2 2 1
1 − Locking bolt
2 − Interlocking slider
Figure 4.5-11: Operating Elements Disconnector and Earthing Switch (front view)

1. Optional: Remove padlock (if fitted)  locking bolt retracts
2. Move interlocking slider (2) by pushing in position “locked”
3. Pull locking bolt (1) and fit padlock
In a few cases the hand crank shaft remains in a disadvantageous angular position
and the interlocking slider can only be moved applying high forces into position
“locked”. In such a case refer to chapter “Using the handle for hand crank interlocking”

Using the handle for hand crank interlocking
Disconnector
1. Move interlocking slider (1, Figure 4.5-12) to the right
2. Insert handle for hand crank interlocking with tip (1, Figure 4.5-13) ahead into
opening (2, Figure 4.5-12) with orientation towards the position indicator.
Insert handle up to the edge (2, Figure 4.5-13).
If necessary turn handle slightly
3. Turn handle clockwise until stop
4. Remove handle from opening
Earthing switch
1. Move interlocking slider (3, Figure 4.5-12) to the left
2. Insert handle for hand crank interlocking with tip (1, Figure 4.5-13) ahead into
opening (4, Figure 4.5-12) with orientation towards the position indicator.
Insert handle up to the edge (2, Figure 4.5-13).
If necessary turn handle slightly
3. Turn handle counterclockwise until stop
4. Remove handle from opening
Interlocking sliders (1, Figure 4.5-12) or (3) can be moved with low resistance into
position “locked”. If necessary use the handle with borehole (3, Figure 4.5-13) ahead
as prolongation of the stud at the interlocking slider.
Disconnector 2 4 Earthing switch
1 3
1 − Interlocking slider 3 − Interlocking slider

2 − Opening 4 − Opening
Figure 4.5-12: Operating elements disconnector/earthing switch (front view)
2
3 1
1 − Tip
2 − Edge
3 − Borehole
Figure 4.5-13: Handle for hand crank interlocking

4.5.2.3 Hand crank

For manual operation of the disconnector/earthing switch a hand crank (1,
Figure 4.5-14) has been supplied. In case the access to the disconnector/earthing
from the front is restricted, a hand crank with a cardan joint (2) is optionally available.
The handle for hand crank interlocking (3) is used against high mechanical forces dur-
ing operation of the interlocking slider during interlocking of the operation by hand
crank with a padlock.
A hexagon socket screw key (4) is supplied for loosening the front cover screws.
3
4
1 − Hand crank fixed (Standard)

2 − Hand crank with cardan joint (option)
3 − Handle for hand crank interlocking
4 − Hexagon socket screw key (Allen key)
Figure 4.5-14: Hand crank and accessories


4.5.3.1 Device
Table 4.5-1: Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/126 132/145
Lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV 325 550 650
to earth
Lightning impulse withstand voltage

kV 375 630 750
across isolating distance
Short-time power frequency withstand

kV 140 230 275
voltage to earth
Short-time power frequency withstand

kV 160 265 315
voltage across isolating distance
Frequency Hz 50 / 60
Rated current A 1250 / 1600 / 2000 / 2500
Peak current (at 31.5 kA / 40 kA) kA 80 / 100
Duration of short time current s 3
1 min. power frequency withstand voltage

kV 2
for auxiliary circuits
SF6 minimum functional pressure /

kPa 520 / 600
filling pressure (at 20 C)
Weight without SF6

(without transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 200
− 4-flange 210
kg
Weight without SF6
(with transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 250
− 4-flange 260
Weight of SF6-filling
(without transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 4
− 4-flange 5
kg
Weight of SF6-filling
(with transversal insertion module)
− 3-flange 6
− 4-flange 7

4.5.3.2 Operating Mechanism

Table 4.5-2: Motor with Permanent Magnet Excitation
Ratings DC/AC V 60 110 125 220 250
Tolerance range % −15/+10 −15/+10 −28/+12 −15/+10 −28/+12
Standard* − IEC IEC ANSI IEC ANSI
Power W 150
Start-up current A 15 12 12 6 6
Continuous current A 3 3 3 1.5 1.5
Operating mode − Short-time operation S2 = 10 sec
* IEC 60694, ANSI C37.06-1987 & ANSI C37.33-1987
Table 4.5-3: Operating Times for Disconnector / Earthing Switch
Voltage DC (IEC) V 0,85 Un − 1,1 Un
Voltage DC (ANSI) V 0,72 Un − 1,12 Un
Closing time (contact making) ms p 2000
Opening time (contact separation) ms p 1500
Table 4.5-4: Motor Runtime
Ratings DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Disconnector ms p 3000
Earthing switch ms p 3000
Table 4.5-5: Contact Stroke
Device Stroke
Disconnector mm 89 - 98
Earthing switch mm 89 - 98

Descriptions” in document “Anti-condensation Heater”.

4.5.3.3 Interlocking Switch

Table 4.5-6: Interlocking Switch
Insulation Ratings V AC 380, DC 220
DC-Operating current A 2 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − snap mechanics, spring loaded
Contacts − silver-plated, self-cleaning
4.5.3.4 Auxiliary Switches

Table 4.5-7: Auxiliary Switches
Insulation Ratings V AC 380, DC 450
Short-circuit capability A 1000 (0.3 s)
Switching capacity DC 60 V A 9 (L/R = 20 ms)
Switching capacity DC 110...125 V A 3.5 (L/R = 20 ms)
Connection − plug connection 4.8 x 0.8
Contacting principle − wiping contacts
Contacts − silver-plated, self-cleaning
Number of contacts disconnector

(34 poles for conventional switchgear − optional)
− normally closed 17
−
− normally open 13
− trailing normally closed 2
− leading normally open 2
Number of contacts disconnector

(22 poles for conventional switchgear)
−
− normally open 8
Number of contact earthing switch

(22 poles for conventional switchgear)
−
− normally open 8

4.5.4 Operating Diagram

Insulating distance Full current carrying
reached capacity reached
Contact travel
Main contact
Auxiliary contact, NC
Auxiliary contact, NO
Figure 4.5-15: Operating Diagram Disconnector- / Earthing Switch

4.6 Earthing Switch

with Short Circuit Making Capacity
1
3
4
5
14
15
16
17
13
18 7
21 8
12 9
7
10
20 19 11
1 − Plug device 9 − Drive spindle 16 − Earthing bracket (insulation)
2 − Linkage (auxiliary switch) 10 − Interlocking switch 17 − Contact segments
3 − Driving rod 11 − Manual operator for emergencies 18 − Contact tube
4 − Switching lever 12 − Drive lever 19 − Short circuit conductor (earthing
5 − Cog wheel 13 − Closing spring bracket)
6 − Motor pinion 14 − Fixed contact 20 − Position indicator
7 − Limit switch 15 − Contact pin 21 − Auxiliary switch
8 − Operating mechanism motor
Figure 4.6-1: Operating Mechanism and Main Contacts of the Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity

4.6.1 Design and Operating Principle of the Device

The earthing switch consists of the switching device itself and the fixed contacts
attached to the device to be earthed.
For setting and testing of protection relays and for measuring the voltage drop over
the main conductor path, the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity can be
isolated from the GIS earthing. For this reason, the contact tubes (18) are fixed to the
centered drive system by means of an isolating connection (Figure 4.6-1).
For normal operation, however, the conductors (19) must be properly installed in such
a way to ensure that the contact tubes (18) are connected to earth through the contact
segments (17). The earthing switch has also the capability to interrupt induced cur-
rents during unearthing an overhead line with a parallel line energized.
4.6.2 Design and Operation Principle of the Drive

The earthing switch with short circuit making capacity is equipped with a motor-oper-
ated snap spring operating mechanism. In emergencies, the switch can be operated
manually from the rod end of the drive spindle (9) (Figure 4.6-1).
During an opening operation, the drive motor (8) operates the drive lever (12) through
the drive spindle (9). By this, the drive rod turns and moves the earthing bracket (16)
with the contact pins into the OFF position. At the same time, the closing spring (13) is
being charged for the next closing operation.
During a closing operation, the closing spring (13) passes its dead centre position.
This generates a torque on the switching lever (4) that automatically closes the
device.
The slot in the drive lever (12) allows for independent movement of the contact
system and the charging mechanism once the dead centre position has been passed.
The end positions are determined by inner limit stops.
The indicator switch and the position indicator are driven by a mechanical connection.
The power supply of the motor is deactivated by the limit switch (7). In case the device
is operated manually for emergency use, the interlocking switch (10) opens the motor
circuit. All electrical connections are made by means of a coded plug device (1).
WARNING! The operation of the module without short circuit conductors (19, Figure 4.6-1) is
forbidden, because there is no protection against electrical shock at the bushings
and high voltage may be conducted outside the enclosure.
CAUTION The manual operation for emergencies has a mechanical limit stop. Do not use
force to pass this limit stop, otherwise the operating mechanism might be mechan-
ically damaged!

4.6.2.1 Manual Operation
Note For manual operation all the interlocking conditions have to be fulfilled. The device has
to be unlocked.
In emergencies the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity can be operated
manually directly on the device by means of a handcrank. As soon as the handcrank
is inserted into the operating mechanism the motor circuit is automatically interrupted.
In order to manually operate the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity the
cover has to be removed from the operating mechanism (Figure 4.6-2).
CAUTION When manually operating the device, make sure not to surpass the end position
of the operating mechanism in order to prevent mechanical damage!
Manual operation of the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
(Figure 4.6-2)
Precondition: Neutral Position of Bolt (6)

1. Eventually, remove existing padlock and locking bolt (1)
2. Tighten handle (2) ans move bolt (6) in direction switching position “local
manual control” until a mechanical resistance is perceptible
As soon as a mechanical resistance is reached and a signal for release of
the respective control cubicle is given move handle (2) until mechanical end
stop for releasing the hand crank opening (3) completely
... or ... In case of breakdown of control voltage: As soon as a mechanical resistance
is perceptible:
a) Remove locking screw (4) with tool
c) Tighten handle (2) and move bolt (6) on position “local manual control”
5. Switch earthing switch with short circuit making capacity with hand crank ON
or OFF according to the direction of rotation printed on the switching device
6. Turn hand crank until mechanical end stop
8. Tighten handle (2) and bring bolt (6) into neutral position
9. Insert locking bolt (1) and, eventually, fit padlock
10. In case of breakdown of control voltage: Screw the locking screw (4) back
again

3 5 4 6 2 1
1 − Locking bolt 4 − Locking screw

2 − Handle 5 − Blocking solenoid
3 − Opening 6 − Bolt
Figure 4.6-2: Manual Operation with Handcrank

4.6.2.2 Locking
It is possible to lock the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity electrically
and mechanically both, in the open or in the closed position.
In order to lock the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity, the cover must
be removed from the operating mechanism (Figure 4.6-3).
Note After locking the device it can no longer be operated neither with the motor drive nor
manually with the handcrank.
c
1HDG 911 923 P2 1HDG 911 923 P12
a − Position “Locked”
b − Position 0 Far (Neutral)
c − Position “local manual control”
Figure 4.6-3: Padlocking
Padlocking (Figure 4.6-2)
Precondition: Neutral Position of Bolt (6)

1. Remove padlock and locking bolt (1)
2. Tighten handle (2) and move bolt (6) by tightening in position “locked”
3. Insert locking bolt (1) and fit padlock

4.6.3 Warning signs

Two warning signs according to ISO 3864-2 and ANSI Z535.4-2007 warn of possible
danger.
Note The durability of the warning signs is several years. In case the warning signs are not
sufficiently legible anymore, replace the warning signs. The warning signs can be ordered
as spare parts from the switchgear manufacturer. Attach the warning signs at the same
position (Figure 4.6-4).
1 1
1HDG 911 923 P2 1HDG 911 923 P12
1
1
1 − Warning signs 1HDG171428
Figure 4.6-4: Position of warning signs


4.6.4.1 Switching Device
Table 4.6-1: Earthing Switch with short circuit making capacity
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/126 132/145
Peak current / short circuit making current

kA 80 / 100
(at 31.5 kA / 40 kA)
Short circuit duration s 3
Short-time power frequency withstand voltage

kV 2
(auxiliary circuits)
Power frequency withstand voltage between

contact pin and enclosure with disconnected kV 10
earthing brackets
Min. SF6 operating pressure / filling pressure

kPa 520 / 600
(at 20 C)
Weight without SF6 (incl. operating mechanism) kg 50
4.6.4.2 Operating Mechanism

Table 4.6-2: Motor with Permanent Magnet Excitation
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance % +10 / −15
Power W 150
Start-up current A 15 12 6
Continuous current A 3 3 1.5
Operating mode − short-time operation S2 = 10 sec
Table 4.6-3: Operating Times
DC Voltage V Un 0.85 Un 1.1 Un
Closing time until contact making ms p 3000
Opening time until contact separation ms p 1500
Contact speed 5 ms before making m/s 3.6 ... 4.5

Table 4.6-4: Motor Runtime
Rated Values DC V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Earthing switch ON ms < 2800
Earthing switch OFF ms < 2800
Table 4.6-5: Contact Pin Stroke
Switching device Stroke
Earthing switch with short circuit making ) 2.8

mm 63.5 * 1.8
capacity

Descriptions” in document “Anti-condensation Heater”.
4.6.4.3 Limit Switch

Table 4.6-6: Limit Switch
Rated Values Insulation V AC 380, DC 220
Operating current A 2 (L/R = 20 ms)
Snap mechanics with wash-out

Contacting principle −
magnets
4.6.4.4 Auxiliary Switch

Table 4.6-7: Auxiliary Switch
Rated Values V AC 380, DC 450
Short circuit withstand capability A 1000 (0,3 s)
Switching capacity DC 60 V A 9 (L/R = 20 ms)
Contacting principle − Wiping contacts
Number of contacts
(16 poles with conventional GIS)
−
− Normally closed 10
− Normally open 6

4.6.5 Operating Diagram

Insulating distance Full current carrying
> 80% capacity reached
Contact travel
Main contact
Auxiliary contact, NC
Auxiliary contact, NO
Figure 4.6-5: Operating Diagram Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity

4.7 Separate Current Transformer

Design and Operating Principle
Figure 4.7-1 represents a plan view of the separate current transformer. It is a low
voltage instrument transformer. The cores (4) are integrated in the gas compartment
of the enclosure (5). In the normal case the current transformer is mounted at a flange
of the circuit breaker.
The secondary terminal leads of the cores (4) are brought out of the SF6-gas compart-
ment through a cast-resin insulating plate (3) and are connected to the terminals (1) in
the terminal box (2). The insulating plate (3) accommodates up to 45 outgoing current
leads.
4 3 2 1
5
1 − Terminals 4 − Cores
2 − Terminal box 5 − Enclosure
3 − Insulating plate
1HDG 918 758 A en 09.03.2009 EXTMEHA 20.07.2009 CHSVOTH 4.7-1

4.8 Integrated Current Transformer

Design and Operating Principle
Figure 4.8-1 shows the current transformer integrated in the circuit breaker from the
top. The current transformer cores (1) are integrated in the circuit breaker enclosure
(6) and can be installed in either one of the available flanges.
The integrated current transformer is delivered in the layout with or without terminals.
In both layouts the bushing plate (3) allows for connection of up to 45 leads.
Layout with Terminals
The secondary terminals (2) of the current transfomer cores (1) are lead out of the
SF6-gas compartment through a bushing plate (3) with cast-resin insulation. From
there, they are connected to the terminals (4) in the terminal box (5).
Layout without Terminals
The secondary terminals (2) are connected to the control cubicle directly from the
bushing plate (3). The terminals (4) and the terminal box (5) are not required.
CAUTION All terminals are short circuited and earthed for the transport to site. For the
voltage test of the main circuits and the measurement of the voltage drop of the
main conductor path, all terminals must be either short circuited and earthed or
completely connected. After the tests the earthing connection shall be removed.
Layout with terminals Layout without terminals
ÇÇÇ
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 7 6
1 − Current transformer cores 5 − Terminal box

2 − Secondary terminals 6 − Circuit breaker enclosure
3 − Bushing plate 7 − Earthing plate
4 − Terminals
Figure 4.8-1: Current Transformer

4.9 Inductive Voltage Transformer VT4

Inductive voltage transformers are low power transformers in which the secondary
voltage is proportional to and in phase with the primary voltage for all practical pur-
poses. The voltage transformer of the GIS transforms the network voltage to be
measured into a secondary voltage that can be fed to measuring and protective de-
vices. At the same time, the primary and the secondary windings are galvanically sep-
arated from each other.
The inductive voltage transformer complies with the relevant IEC-, ANSI- and IEEE-
standards (Figure 4.9-1). Usually it has two secondary windings and one auxiliary
winding for earth fault detection. The ratings are project-specific.
The inductive voltage transformer is sectionalized from the adjacent GIS compartment
by means of a barrier insulator (2). It is equipped with two gas fittings (3) and (5), a
SF6-gas moisture filter and a bursting disk (6).
CAUTION The inductive voltage transformer is delivered filled with SF6 at a pressure of
150 kPa. Do not evacuate!
6 4 3 6 5 4 3
2
1
1 − Connection flange 4 − Terminal box

2 − Barrier insulator 5 − Gas fitting Malmkvist type
3 − Gas fitting valve 6 − Bursting disk
Figure 4.9-1: Inductive Voltage Transformer
1HDG 918 759 B en 02.06.2009 EXTNIHA 11.08.2009 CHSVOTH 4.9-1


Table 4.9-1: Inductive Voltage Transformer
Rated Values kV 60/72.5 110/126 132/145
Min. SF6 operating pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520 / 600
Weight without SF6 kg 425
1HDG 918 759 B en 02.06.2009 EXTNIHA 11.08.2009 CHSVOTH 4.9-2

4.10 Surge Arrester Type AZ0

Surge arresters of type “AZ0” (Figure 4.10-1) are used in SF6-gas-insulated switch-
gear to protect against atmospheric overvoltages and switching surges. These ar-
resters can be connected at any unused flange (if necessary by using an adapter) of
the switchgear.
These surge arresters are of three-phase encapsulated design with an internal gas
compartment sealed by the barrier insulator (5).
The active components of the surge arrester are metal-oxide (MO) resistor disks
arranged in a stack. The flats of the individual disks have conductive metal coatings.
The height of the stack depends on the system voltage. Specially designed tie-rods
and springs maintain the correct contact pressure in the stack irrespective of tempera-
ture fluctuations.
Shielding electrodes at the HV-side of the resistor stacks control the electrical field of
the active components and the earthed metal enclosure.
The metal enclosure (1) and the base plate (3) of the surge arrester are made of
aluminum. The bursting disc (4) and the two gas connections (2) are mounted at the
base plate. One of the gas connections accommodates the density monitor. On the
base plate optional bushings (7) are provided for mounting surge counters or current-
metering devices. In Figure 4.10-2 and Figure 4.10-3 the mounting position of the
surge counters (8, 9) is shown. The base plate also has four M16 tap holes which are
provided to connect the earthing conductors. The bushings conducting the surge cur-
rent have to be connected directly to the base plate. In case optional surge current
monitors are applied they are connected between bushings and base plate.
1 4 View A 2
5 3 7 6
1 − Metal enclosure 4 − Bursting disc 6 − Earthing connection M16

2 − Gas connection 5 − Barrier insulator 7 − Bushing
3 − Base plate
Figure 4.10-1: Surge Arrester Type AZ 041B/C
1HDG 518 575 C en 26.09.2007 EXTNIHA 19.10.2007 CHSFRVW 4.10-1

Figure 4.10-2 shows the mounting of the surge counter type Bowthorpe SC13 on the
base plate of horizontal mounted surge arrester.
8 − Surge counter Type Bowthorpe SC13
Figure 4.10-2: Mounting the surge counter type Bowthorpe SC13

Figure 4.10-3 shows the mounting of the surge counter type SAM 2 on the flange side
(barrier insulator) on vertical mounted surge arrester.
9
9
3 − Base plate
5 − Barrier insulator
9 − Surge counter
Figure 4.10-3: Mounting the surge counter type SAM 2 on the flange side (barrier insulator)


Table 4.10-1: Ratings of Surge Arrester Type AZ041B/C
Rated Values AZ041B AZ041C
Up to 25 % over Uc Up to 25 % over Uc
Voltage Ueff kV
(depends on model) (depends on model)
Frequency Hz 50 / 60 50 / 60
Limit discharge current max. (peak value) kA 100 100
Discharge current (peak value) kA 10 20
Energy absorption capacity per kV Uc kJ 9,6 13,5
Line discharge class acc. to IEC 60 099-4 − 3 4
Permissible ambient temperature (without heating) C −30 to +45 −30 to +45
Minimum functional pressure / filling pressure (at 20 °C) kPa 520 / 600 520 / 600
Maximum continuous load voltage Uc kVeff 48 − 100 101 − 150 58 − 116 117 − 174
Max. length L mm 1670 2280 1780 (1720)* 2440 (2380)*
Weight without SF6 kg 350 400 370 440
SF6 weight appr. kg 13 19 14 20
SF6 volume appr. ltr 340 480 360 520
* Reduced length L because of lateral mounted bursting disc.

4.11 Anti-Condensation Heater

The rated values of the anti-condensation heater are listed in Table 4.11-1.
Silicon connection leads (lead ends: tinned)

Figure 4.11-1: Silicon Heating Plate
Table 4.11-1: Anti-condensation heater
Rated Values V 60 110 − 125 220 − 250
Tolerance range % −15 / +10 −18 / +27
Heater power for integrated local control cabinet W 45
Heater power for terminal box

− Voltage transformer 15
− Integrated current transformer W 15
(circuit breaker compartment)
− Separate current transformer (barrel-type) 15
Heater power for operating mechanisms

− Circuit breaker Indoor 70
− Circuit breaker Outdoor 70 + 15
− Disconnector / earthing switch W 15
− Earthing switch with short circuit 15
making capacity
− Disconnector 15
1HDG 518 451 A en 01.12.2008 EXTMEHA 22.12.2008 CHSVOTH 4.11-1

4.12 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS)

4.12.1 Design and Functional Description
Characteristics
The High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) is able to recognize the service voltage
on the conductors via a capacitive measurement.
Voltage detection systems are normally used in bays which are not equipped with a
voltage transformer. The main application is to observe the voltage-free state of a high
voltage cable before closing the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity.
The voltages of all three phases are measured separately via capacitive voltage sen-
sors and are transferred through coaxial cables to the detection unit. The detection
unit shows the voltage-free state by relay contacts. For additional information the
detection unit provides a display on the front panel.
The requirements for voltage indication acc. to IEC 61243-5 are fulfilled.
4.12.2 Security Notice

WARNING! At the terminals of the HVDS perilous voltages may occur. Therefore the according
parts of the GIS must to be earthed before work.
WARNING! The HVDS is not suitable for assuring the voltage-free state acc. to the require-
ments for protection of persons. Hence, during all work on the GIS the safety rules
have to be followed strictly (1HDG 518 020)!
WARNING! All work on the HVDS shall be only carried out by specially authorized staff!
WARNING! The sensors must be always connected the detection device or connected directly
to earth at the terminal box. Energizing the GIS with not properly connected sen-
sors may damage parts of the HVDS or the GIS.
WARNING! The electrodes on the barrier insulator are used for electrical field control inside
the barrier insulator. Without proper connection increased partial discharge may
occur.
Note During a partial discharge measurement all sensors shall be connected to earth directly
inside the terminal boxes.

4.12.3 Equipment and Functional Descriptions

System Architecture
GIS Local control cubicle
Terminal box Detection device

L3
Electrode
PE
L2
PE
HV Off
L1
PE No Error
PE
Surge arrestor
Capacitor module
Figure 4.12-1: System architecture
Figure 4.12-1 shows the typical system architecture for detection device located inside
the local control cubicle (LCC). For each phase a sensor provides a small measure-
ment voltage. Surge arrestors inside the terminal box suppress transient voltages
coming from the high voltage line.
From the terminal box the signals are conducted to the detection unit through coaxial
cables.
Capacitor modules allow adjustment to application specific configuration.
Measurement of Voltage
Figure 4.12-2 shows the schematic for a single phase voltage detection according to
Figure 4.12-1. The electrode builds in combination the high voltage conductor a ca-
pacity C1. This capacity forms together with the capacities on secondary side (C2 + CE
+ CA + CI) a capacitive voltage divider that transforms the high voltage UHV to a small
measuring voltage U2.
The ratio between primary voltage and measuring voltage is given with
ǒC ) CC ))C1 ) C Ǔ
U 2 + U HV· 2 E
1
A I

C1
Detection device
UHV
C2 Z CE CA CI U2
Figure 4.12-2: Schematic for Single Phase Voltage Detection
Within the schematic the components are:

S C1= Primary capacity of electrode to primary conductor
S C2 = Stray capacity of the electrode to earth
S Z = Surge arrestor
S CE = Capacity of coaxial cable
S CA = Capacity of capacitor module (trim capacity)
S CI = Input capacity of detection device
S UHV = Voltage of primary conductor to earth
S U2 = Input voltage of detection device
C1, C2 and CI are fixed values, whereas CE is dependant of the length of the coaxial
cable (typically 101 pF per meter). Using CA as free parameter, the ratio can be ad-
justed to different system voltages Ur.
According to IEC 61243-5 the voltage evaluation for voltages below 0.1 x Ur shall not
react but for voltages  0.45 x Ur has to react. This means that in the range of 0.1 x Ur
 U  0.45 x Ur detection is possible but not necessary.
The trim capacity CA is calculated project-specific from ABB to comply with the re-
quired limits.

4.12.4 Capacitive Sensors

The capacitive sensor can be integrated into the GIS in different ways.
4.12.4.1 Sensor at Cable Sealing End

There are three electrodes located at the housing of the cable end unit (CEU). Each
sensor consists of a circular plate opposite the cable plug. A gas tight feed-through
conducts the measured signal into the terminal box.
1 − Electrode
2 − Terminal box
3 − IEC cable plug
4 − IEC cable end housing
Figure 4.12-3: Cable Sealing End Unit with HVDS Sensor
Today sensors at cable sealing ends are available for

S IEC cable sealing end
S Cable plug type C

4.12.4.2 Sensor at Barrier Insulator

Field control electrodes inside the barrier insulator are used as sensing element. The
connection to the terminal box is made through short coaxial cables.
1 − Terminal box
2 − Adapter for coaxial cable
3 − Inner conductor
4 − Electrode
Figure 4.12-4: Sensor at Barrier Insulator
4.12.5 Detection Device

Depending on the applied measuring voltages the detection device decides whether a
voltage is applied or not. The detected state is made available by relay contacts and
display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 − LED HV On (red) 5 − Voltage indication phase L1

2 − LED HV Off (green) 6 − Voltage indication phase L2
3 − LED Error (red) 7 − Voltage indication phase L3
4 − LED Power (red) 8 − Cover for test plugs
Figure 4.12-5: Front panel of detection device

4.12.5.1 Relay Contacts

The detection device provides 4 isolated normally open contacts. Two functions are
made available by two contacts:
S Contact “No Error”: This contact is closed when the detection device is pow-
ered by auxiliary voltage and all three phases are in the same state (either
“Voltage free” or “Voltage present”)
S Contact “HV Off”: This contact is closed when the detection device is pow-
ered by auxiliary voltage and all 3 phases are in the state “Voltage free”
When auxiliary voltage is missing both contacts are open.
4.12.5.2 Light Emitting Diodes (LED)

4 light emitting diodes (LED) are available for visualization of the current state:
S HV ON: This red LED is high lighted when at least one phase is in state “Vol-
tage present”
S HV OFF: This green LED is high lighted when all 3 phases are in state
“No voltage”
S Error: This red LED is high lighted when the phases are not in the same state
S Power: This red LED is high lighted when auxiliary voltage is present
4.12.5.3 LC-Display
The detection device provides a liquid crystal display (LCD) to visualize the state of
each phase separately. For indication a flash symbol is used.
Table 4.12-1: LC-Display
Condition Meaning Symbol
U < 0.1 x Ur “Voltage free” No indication
U > 0.45 x Ur “Voltage present”
U = Ur “Voltage present” and

“Maintenance test o.k.”
Where
U = Phase to Earth voltage
Ur = Normal service voltage
The energy of the input signals is sufficient for operation of the LCD. Therefore, a
visualization of voltage state is possible even without auxiliary voltage.

4.12.5.4 Auxiliary Voltage

For activation of relay contacts and LED’s an auxiliary voltage in the range according
to technical data given below is necessary.
The LCD can operate without auxiliary voltage.
4.12.5.5 Test Plugs

On the front panel test plugs are provided either to test the detection device itself or to
verify the input signals. To access the test plugs pull the cover at the upper side. Test
plugs can be used to test the detection device by applying a test voltage. For function
test the test plugs are used to connect to the measurement voltage.
4.12.5.6 Mounting
The detection device can be placed either in the local control cubicle or directly at the
GIS, using a small enclosure.
The device snaps into a panel cut-out with dimensions according to technical data
given below.
4.12.6 Applications
The HVDS is available for gas isolated switchgear type ELK-04 in indoor applications.
It is not available yet for outdoor applications.
The maximum distance between capacitive sensor and detection unit is limited to
12 meters.
It is not recommended to use HVDS in combination with partial discharge (PD) mea-
surement systems, since the active measurement of the detection unit will disturb the
PD measurement. During PD measurements all sensors should be connected to earth
directly inside the terminal boxes.

4.12.7 Installation
The following instructions are divided depending on the installed type and component
of HVDS.
4.12.7.1 General
S The coaxial cable must not be cut to length. Excessive cable can be coiled
up (e.g. behind LCC) and fixed.
S Only cable glands with screen connection should be used.
S The shield of the coaxial cables must be connected to earth at every cable
gland.
S The capacitor modules are determined depending on the installation con-
figuration; in some configurations no capacitor modules are needed.
Criteria are: Mounting type of the detection device, rated voltage of the in-
stallation and also the type of measurement (whereas there may be differ-
ences depending on the type of the cable sealing end).
4.12.7.2 Wiring of Detection Device

1. Assemble detection device into the front panel cut-out
2. Feed the coaxial cables through the cable glands. The end of the coaxial ca-
ble with two faston terminals is directed to the detection device. Do not
tighten the cable glands until all cable work are finished
3. Mark the coaxial cables on both ends with phase designators according to
wiring plan
4. Connect the 4.8 mm female faston terminals of the coaxial cables to signal
inputs XL1..3 of the detection device
5. If capacitor modules are used:
The capacitors are connected between the wide 6.3 mm male faston termi-
nals of the coaxial cables and the male faston terminal (protective earth) of
the detection device
If no capacitor modules are used:
The 6.3 mm male faston terminals on the coaxial cable have to be protected
with adequate resources, i.e. shrinking hose or dummy plug, against uninten-
tional contact
6. Connect the earth potential of the LCC to the male faston terminal PE of the
detection device. The earth wire must be short as possible; if necessary this
wire must be cut to length
7. Connect signal outputs and power supply to terminal block X1 of the detec-
tion device according to wiring scheme

5
1
1 − Earth wire 4 − Signal inputs XL 1..3

2 − Capacitor module 5 − Terminal block X1
3 − Coaxial cable
Figure 4.12-6: Connection at detection device

8. After the position of the coaxial cables is fixed, the screen of the coaxial
cables must be connected to earth potential at the cable glands
4.12.7.3 Wiring of Sensor at Cable Sealing End

The connection must be made for each phase.
1. Lay out the coaxial cables loosely to the terminal box and open the terminal
box
2. Connect the cable screen to earth potential at the cable gland:
S Remove approx. 10 mm of cable sheath
S Insert cable into the gland until contact is made between gland and
cable screen. Tighten the nut
3. Screw-on the cable core together with the surge arrestor at the electrode ter-
minal
4. Screw-on the opposite end of the surge arrestor to the terminal box housing
5. Close the terminal box. Take care that the sealing is in place
Figure 4.12-7: Terminal box on cable sealing end

4.12.7.4 Preparation of the Barrier Insulator

Inside the barrier insulator three electrodes for electrical field control are located.
These electrodes are normally connected to the flange of the barrier insulator by
screws. For ELK-04 / 520 each electrode is earthed with 2 screws, for ELK-04 / 735
each electrode is earthed with 3 screws.
The electrodes of each phase are connected via adapters and coaxial cables to the
terminal box. In Figure 4.12-4 the side view of an ELK-04 barrier insulator is dis-
played. One can see the inner conductors and the electrodes opposite. The adapters
connect to one electrode each, the remaining screw holes are not connected and are
covered by plastic screws.
The adapters provide an N-style plug. The coaxial cable coming from the terminal box
is connected to this plug.
1. The earth screws on the barrier insulator are covered with silicon, which must
be removed with an appropriate tool before later work
2. Remove all earth screws around the barrier insulator
3. Screw in one adapter for each phase according to Figure 4.12-9. Depending
on space conditions, other screw holes can be used to connection as long as
each adapter connects to a different electrode
4. Insert plastic screws into the remaining holes
5. Cover the screws and adapters with silicon
6. Mount the protection cover over each adapter
Figure 4.12-8: Earth screw with removed silicon
Figure 4.12-9: Insertion of the adapter

4.12.7.5 Wiring of Sensors at Barrier Insulator

1. First mount the terminal box to the flange
2. Insert the coaxial cables into the cable glands of the terminal box and make
sure that the screen of the coaxial cables is connected to earth
3. Connect the coaxial cables to the adapters according to the phase definition.
Remaining cable length must be coiled up
4. Secure the cable and plugs against loosening

4.12.8 Commissioning
Commissioning includes a functional test and verification of threshold values.
Verify cabling before energizing the switchgear.
Note During PD measurements all sensors should be connected to earth directly inside the
terminal boxes, since partial discharge measurement may be distorted.
4.12.8.1 Functional Test

Functional testing is supported by an integrated function of the detection device. Only
when the input current from the capacitive tap is above a defined level, “Maintenance
test o.k.” is displayed (see Table 4.12-1).
This test requires to a) earth the high voltage line and b) energize to the system with
rated voltage. The detected state of the line is displayed by LED’s and flash symbols
on the LCD.
At earthed condition the flash symbols must be dimmed, additionally the LED’s must
be illuminated according to Figure 4.12-10.
At rated voltage the filled flash symbols of all three phases must be visible (see
Table 4.12-1), additionally the LED’s must be illuminated according to Figure 4.12-11.
HV On HV Off Error Power
Figure 4.12-10: LED display at earthed condition
HV On HV Off Error Power
Figure 4.12-11: LED display at rated voltage
4.12.8.2 Threshold Verification

For threshold verification the nominal system voltage is applied and the sensor signals
are measured on the front panel of the detection device by an standard A.C. voltmeter
with high impedance ( input resistance RIN = 1 MegOhm, input capacitance CIN = 10
pF). The voltage is measured for each phase separately between test plug L1, L2 or
L3 and earth.
The test is passed if the measured signal is in the range between 8.9 and 40 Volts
R.M.S.
Note This test can be performed phase by phase, e.g. when a single-phase voltage generator
is used.
WARNING! The test plugs at the detection device is directly connected to the electrodes, i.e.
without galvanic isolation. In case of an failure perilous voltages may occurs at the
test plugs. Before any work the affected switchgear parts have to be earthed. Only
connecters with protection against contact should be used.

4.12.8.3 Maintenance
The detection device is maintenance free.
To check functionality of the system a functional test can be performed, see chapter
“4.12.8.1 Functional Test”.
Note During PD measurements all sensors shall be connected to earth directly inside the
terminal boxes, since partial discharge measurement may be distorted.
It is recommended to replace the following devices after 20 years :

S Detection Device
S Trim Capacitors
S Surge Arrestors
4.12.9 Trouble Shooting

Table 4.12-2: Problem identification
Problem Cause / Action
LED “Power” is off Auxiliary voltage source is missing. Check

connection to auxiliary voltage source.
When HV line is not energized the LED The detection device detects at least one
“HV On” is on input as “HV On”. Identify the affected phase
on the LC-Display.
If HV line is connected to an overhead line,
in seldom cases cross-talk may appear from
other overhead lines running in parallel.
a) Verify the HVDS functionality when HV
line is earthed
b) The threshold value of an input is not
correct.
See problem “Threshold value is not cor-
rect”
c) Contact ABB
When HV line is earthed the LED “HV On” The detection device detects at least one
or LED “Error” is on input as “HV On”. Since HV line is not ener-
gized, a input receives a false signal. Ident-
ify the affected phase on the LC-Display.
a) The shield of the coaxial cable is not
properly connected to earth.
Check coaxial cables
b) A signal input is disconnected.
Check coaxial cables
c) The threshold value of an input is not
correct.
rect”
When HV line is energized the LED “HV Off” The detection device detects all inputs as
is on “HV Off”.
a) The signal inputs are earthed. Check for
earth jumpers inside terminal box.
b) The threshold value of the inputs are not
correct. See problem “Threshold value is
not correct”.

Problem Cause / Action
When HV line is energized the LED “Error” The detection device detects at least one
is on input as “HV On” while another input is de-
tected as “HV Off”. Identify the affected
phase on the LC−Display.
a) Check if all 3 phases are energized
b) A signal input is disconnected or the
input is connected to earth by a jumper.
Check for jumpers inside terminal box or
connection of coaxial cables.
c) The threshold value of an input is not
correct
rect”.
The threshold value is not correct Verify threshold value according to 4.12.8.2.
If threshold values are not correct, the trim
capacitor is defect or has a false value.
a) Verify the printed value on the capacitor
b) Check connections
c) Replace trim capacitor
d) Contact ABB
Table 4.12-3: Function matrix
Voltage on phase Contacts LED

Auxiliary
No Error
LCD
HV Off
HV Off
HV On
Power
Condition
Error
voltage
L1
L2
L3
Power off,
Off No No No Open Open
No HV
Power off,
Off Yes No No Open Open
HV on L1
No HV On No No No Close Close
HV on L1 On Yes No No Open Open
HV on L2 On No Yes No Open Open
HV on L3 On No No Yes Open Open
HV on L1, L2, L3 On Yes Yes Yes Close Open


Table 4.12-4: Technical Data HVD-System
Rated values Unit Value
Primary voltage kV 72.5 ... 170 kV
Frequency Hz 50 / 60 Hz
Application Indoor
Temperature range °C −40 ... +85
Requirements Acc. to IEC 61243-5
Max. cable length between electrode and

m 12
detection device
Table 4.12-5: Technical Data Detection Device
Rated values Unit Value
Kind of protection IP 54
Operational temperature °C −25 ... +55 C
Auxiliary voltage V DC/AC 24 ... 230
Power consumption VA Max. 1
250 VDC; 0.3 A ohmic

Breaking capacity of relays
250 VAC; 5 A ohmic
Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 144 x 48 x 64
Required cut-out mm 140 x 46

4.13 Control Cubicle

4.13.1 Description
Control cubicles are available as integrated cubicles which are installed to the busbar
of the bay or as separate cubicles. The control cubicles are available for indoor and
outdoor application.
4.13.1.1 General
Painting
The control cubicles are dependant from supplier varnished wet or coated with pow-
der. If they are coated with powder, the desired colour can be applied with another wet
varnishing. To every wet varnish a fungicide is added.
S Thickness of dry film 80m
S Adhesive strength acc. to DIN EN ISO 2409 <= Gt 1
S Degree of hardness acc. to ISO 2815
S Temperature resistance 150 °C permanent load
S Degree of brilliance satin-frosted <60° 15-30%
S Standard colours:
− RAL 5003saphireblue
Dimensional accuracy
S According to DIN ISO 2768 T1, T2 „medium“
Stability
S Complete cubicle:
After mounting on site, alignment and fixing of the cubicles the saw-tooth
curve of the top edge of the door exceeds not more than 3 mm.
S Doors:
Designed for an additional load of 100 kg in the center of gravity of the door
S Swing frame:
Designed for an additional load of 200 kg
Seismic withstand capability acc. to IEC 60068-3-3
This standard includes strength specifications acc. to class AG5 with 5 m/s2 resp. in
the application class III with 15 m/s2 for the acceleration of decks.
1HDG 518 429 A en 04.10.2010 EXTNIHA 08.10.2010 CHSVOTH 4.13-1

Protective Earthing Cubicle Parts
All parts of the control cubicle are connected in a conductive way with each other. Var-
nished parts are earthed on the screwing with a minimum of two diametral placed con-
tact washers.
The doors are connected to the cubicle with two flexible CU-strips top and bottom with
a minimum of 4 mm2.
The swing frame ist connected to the cubicle with two flexible CU-strips top and bot-
tom with a minimum of 16 mm2.
Protective Earthing Cubicle
From the earthing bar to the earthing of the building.
4.13.1.2 Integrated control cubicle
Cubicle Variantes
The following cubicle variants are available:
Cubicle variant Height a in mm Width b in mm Depth c in mm
For installation to 875 995 700

ELK 04/520
ELK-04/520
875 795 700
1000 995 700
1000 795 700
For installation to 1850 800 600

ELK 04/735
ELK-04/735
2000 800 600
Figure 4.13-1: Integrated control cubicle for installation to ELK-04/520

Control panel Glas insert
Figure 4.13-2: Integrated control cubicle for ELK-04/735

Cubicle
Steel body, visible surfaces painted, side and rear walls can be removed from outside,
removable lifting eyes, frame design, galvanised frame not painted
Cubicle fixation
With clamps at rear U or L profiles
Door
Door with glass insert or control panel, door opening 170°
Swift frame (option)
for application of 19” devices, opening angle 170°, usually fixation opposite to door
fixation, fixable at 170°, 18 height units (HU) for cubicle height 1000 mm, 36 HE cu-
bicle height 1850 mm and 2000 mm, locking with swifting handle
Completion
Door fixation left is standard, right as option, Tiefen profiles right and left for fixation of
vertical terminal blocks
Cable fixation profile on left side with protective earth bar above, completion with wir-
ing frame
Protective earthing bar, cable fixation profiles in cubicles at 520 mm busbar only left,
in cubicles at 735 mm busbar right and left
Fixation of swift frame in cubicles at 520 mm busbar right only
Bottom opening in cubicle at 520 mm busbar left only, in cubicle at 735 mm on both
sides
11 openings for plugs at maximum
Bottom plate
External cables are feed through openings with canted edges in bottom plate, can be
closed with sliding canted plate. Sliding with 5 cm, sealing usually with mounting foam
on site
Openings for plugs and cable glands in rear wall (busbar 520 mm), in top and side
wall (busbar 735 mm)
Fixed bottom plate with cable glands as option

4.13.1.3 Separate control cubicle
Cubicle variants
The following cubicle variants are available:
Cubicle variants Height a in mm Width b in mm Depth c in mm
2000 800 600
2000 800 800
2000 1000 600

Separate
control cubicle
2000 1000 800
2000 1200 600
2000 1200 800
Separate
control cubicle 1850 800 600
outdoor application
Control panel Glass insert
Control panel Glass insert

Figure 4.13-3: Typical variants separate control cubicles

Figure 4.13-4: Separate control cubicle (Outdoor application)
Fixation points
For screw connections to floor
Cubicle
Door with glass insert or control panel, removable lifting eyes, frame design, galva-
nised, not painted, side and rear walls removable from outside, visible surfaces
painted
Erection
Usually opposite of GIS, cubicle width corresponds to GIS bay width, adjacent cu-
bicles with inner side walls as partition with openings for ring wiring cable duct
Door
Door with glass insert or control panel, door opening angle 170°
Swift frame (option)
for application of 19” devices, opening angle 170° fixation usually opposite of door,
opening fixation at 170°, 36 heigth units (HU) , closing with swiftable handle
Variant for outdoor application
With base frame 300 mm
With swift frame only
Fixation points: Two screwing connection to floor
External cable through bottom plate, througth three openings arranged left, in the
middle and right with canted edges, can be closed with sliding canted plateds, sliding
range 5 cm, sealing with mounting foam on site. Alternatively fixed bottom plate with
cable glands unless for system cables with heavy plugs.

4.13.1.4 Variant for indoor application
Material, protection against corrosion

S Cubicle frame of separate cubicles:
sendzimir galvanisation, material thickness 2 mm
S Outer plates:
painted, material thickness 2 mm
S Inner partition plates of separate cubicles:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, material thickness 2 mm
S Inner plated, bottom plates etc.:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, material thickness 2 mm
S Swift frame:
sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating, steel sheet
S Hinges, lock, screws etc.:
protection against corrosion
Galvanisation
S Galvanisation:
Outer layer thickness: Min. 12 m,
Inner layer thickness: Min. 8 m.
S Sendzimir galvanisation or aluminium zink coating:
Layer thickniss on both sides: Min. 12 m.
Cold galvanisation only on cutting edges and for repair purposes.
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529

S IP41, design allows degrees of protection up to IP54
4.13.1.5 Variant for outdoor application
Material, protection against corrosion
Stainless steel
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529

S IP54 − (with roof)

4.13.2 Wiring System of the Control Cubicle

General
For having enough mounting space with integrated control cubicles for all required
devices a special mounting and wiring system is used.
Mounting
The wiring system consists of prefabricated parts which are mounted to a wiring
frame. The frame mainly is made of vertical bearing rail on the sides, horizontal
mounting bars, mounting straps and wiring profiles. This frame replaces the back-side
mounting plate. The mounting bars on the front side are elaborated according to the
DIN mounting plates. Here are the single devices snapped on. Single vertical posi-
tioned mounting bars on the side of the cubicle are provided for mounting of terminal
bars. In the wiring frame distributed on the height some single horizontal covers inten-
tionally are carried out a bit larger for being able to grip behind the frame.
Wiring
For this wiring system the wiring is established in the back area. The wiring is totally
accessible from the front.
Advantages
S Because of the establishment of wiring in the back area, cable channels are
not required. With this technic it’s possible to reduce the volume of the con-
trol cubicle compared to a free standing type about approx. 45 %.
S The wiring is done with automatically produced single wires.
S Because of the loose distribution of the wiring over the complete back side of
the control cubicle and division of wiring and device area the air ciculation is
improved, a good heat emission is given. Special hot spots as it happens in
filled-up cable channels are avoided.
S A fast and uncomplicated accessibility is given for refinished wiring or
changes. There is always enough space in the wiring area for additional wir-
ing.
S In case of a faulty device the device may be changed immediately and ser-
vice-friendly because the single wirings for the device connections are
passed from behind to front via special supporting cams. The connecting
wires stay because of the cams in position and make any confusion imposs-
ible.

4.13.3 Power Demand

The power demand per bay is subject to the type of control technology and switch-
gear.
The consumption values to be considered for a typical bay (double busbar with circuit
breaker, earthing switch and three disconnector / earthing switches) are displayed in
the table on page 2 hereunder.
It has to be distinguished between the following types of consumers respectively

loads:
Permanent Loads
AC
S Cubicle lighting (with open cubicle door)
S Heater for control cubicle
S Heater for operating mechanisms (depends on the control voltage:
from 60 VAC to 125 VAC / up to 250 VAC optional)
S MCBs for AC-circuits
DC
S Alarm annunciators (max. at lamp test)
S Position indicators
S Auxiliary relays
S Contactors CB control
S Bay control unit REF54x / REC6xx
S MCBs for DC-circuits
Short Time Load, 1 sec. - 30 sec.
DC
S Hydraulic pump CB, 24 sec.
S Motors for disconnector / earthing switch, 1 sec.
S Interlocking solenoid
disconnector / earthing switch,
1 sec. (only ELK-04)
For the max. power demand sum only one drive and interlocking solenoid together
with the hydraulic pump function is relevant at the same time.

Dyn. Peak Load, < 1 sec.
DC
S Switch-on peak
Trip / Close coils CB,
20 ms
Starting Current
S Hydraulic pump CB
50 ms
S Operating mechanism motors for disconnector / earthing switch,
50 ms
For the max. power demand sum only the hydraulic pump and one operating mechan-
ism motor is relevant at the same time.
Temporarely Load
AC
S Panel socket outlet
Simultaneity
For the calculation of simultaneity-factors it has to be considered, that

S a busbar protection can trip all circuit breakers simultaneously.
S the hydraulic pump of circuit breaker will start to run only after an ON-com-
mand or subject to the position of the spring travel monitoring level to avoid
simultaneous start of all CB pumps and hereby high loads.
S under normal conditions only one operating mechanism motor will run at a
certain time in one bay (Double Command Blocking)
Protection Relays
The power demand of possibly built in protection relays strongly depends on the type
and make of the relay and may vary considerably. Due to this reason the table below
does not show typical Watt figures for such relays. Therefore this demand is not taken
under consideration in the table for the typical power demand below.

Table 4.13-1: Power demand control cubicle
Conventional SCADA systems SCADA systems

control without monitoring with monitoring
Lighting 40 W 40 W 40 W
Cubicle heating 75 W 75 W 75 W
Operating mech.
170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W 170 W / 190 W
heating
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Sum AC
286 W / 306 W 286 W / 306 W 286 W / 306 W
Permanent load
Alarm annunciator 10 W -- --
Position indicators 8W -- --
Auxiliary relais 15 W -- --
Contactors CB con-
21 W 21 W 21 W
trol
Monitoring -- -- 50 W
Bay control unit -- 60 W 60 W
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Sum DC
56 W 83 W 133 W
Permanent load
Hydraulic pump 660 W 660 W 660 W
Operating mechan-
200 W 200 W 200 W
ism motor
Interlocking solenoid 30 W 30 W 30 W
Sum DC
990 W 990 W 990 W
Short time load
Trip coil I LS, L/R =

300 W 300 W 300 W
40 ms
Trip coil II LS, L/R =

300 W 300 W 300 W
40 ms
Hydraulic pump,
660 W 660 W 660 W
IA / IN = 4
Operating mechan-
300 W 300 W 300 W
ism motor, IA / IN = 7
Sum DC
1560 W 1560 W 1560 W
Starting load
Socket outlet 2300 W 2300 W 2300 W
Sum AC
2300 W 2300 W 2300 W
Time to time load

4.13.4 Heat Balance

Installed Power Losses
The total power consumption of a local control cubicle includes supplying different cu-
bicle-external components, which are not to be considered for a rating.
Furthermore single consumers don’t have any influence to the heat emission during
permanent operation.
Therefore the following positions of electrical power may be excluded for the calcula-
tion of the installed heating power in the control cubicle:
AC:
S Light: Only at open door
S Anti-condensation heaters of the local control cabinet:
Controlled by thermostat and hygrostat
S Anti-condensation heaters of the operating mechanisms: External load
S Socket: External load
DC:
S Relays circuit breaker supervision: External load
S All short-time and peak loads: External load
With this the maximum heating efficiency in worst case is calculated (under the as-
sumption electric power equals heating efficiency) from the components micro circuit
breaker and computing assembly.
With this a sum of 68 W as installed power loss results for a control cubicle with one
computing assembly of the type REC6xx, 68 W with a combined control and protec-
tion unit type REF54x.
For further computing assemblies corresponding power losses have to be added, a

fan is not needed.
The internal consumption of eventually build-in protection relays is dependant of the

type of relay used and may differ extremely. For this reason this is not mentioned in
the typical overview.

Table 4.13-2: Power loss
Conventional control SCADA systems
MCBs AC 1W 1W 1W
Sum AC permanent load 1W 1W 1W
Alarm annunciator 10 W -- --
Position indicators 8W -- --
Auxiliary relais 15 W -- --
Bay control unit REC670 -- 60 W --
Bay control unit -- -- 60 W

REF542plus
MCBs DC 2W 2W 2W
Sum DC permanent load 35 W 62 W 62 W

Radiating Power Loss
For a local control cubicle in steel plate design the power loss via the radiation on the
surface is determined in dependance of different agreements.
Determining factors are the ambient temperature and the maximum permissible inner
temperature for the cubicle.
Depending on the cubicle variant the power loss via radioation differs. The following
values apply:
Power loss via radiation in W

Cubicle variant Width in mm
Calculated Design value
Integrated
control cubicle 800 430 350
(ELK-04/735)
Integrated
control cubicle up to 995 260 200
(ELK-04/520)
Separate
1200 460 400
control cubicle
Separate
up to 1000 340 280
control cubicle
Separate
control cubicle 800 t.b.d. t.b.d.
(outdoor application)
Air conditioning measures
The natural power dissipation via the surface is sufficient for one installed bay control
unit plus one protection relais.
In case additional devices are implemented forced cooling might become necessary.

4.13.5 Delivery
4.13.5.1 Inspection of Delivered Equipment
When it arrives at the construction site, please check whether your equipment is com-
plete and whether it has been damaged during shipping. If damage is found, deter-
mine the extent and cause of damage and the person responsible and compile a dam-
age report.
4.13.5.2 Intermediate Storage

If the control cubicles are not mounted immediately after they have been delivered to
the construction site, they must be stored temporarily in a dry, dust-free place.
Permissible temperature range for storage site

S Dry air conditions (max. 40 %) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −40 _C to +55 _C
S Damp air conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : −25 _C to +40 _C
Packaging which has been opened for check purpose of the delivered equipment
must then be carefully resealed.
Note When the control cubicles are unpacked, the cubicle heating must be switched on without
delay in order to prevent the build-up of condensation water.
CAUTION Do not affix labels to the painted surfaces of control cubicles!
4.13.5.3 Condition of Switchgear Building

Before mounting work begins, the switchgear building in which the control cubicles are
to be mounted must be completed to such an extent that no further damage resulting
from damp or dirt can arise.
Requirements for the GIS Building

S Windows and doors must be fitted
S Walls and ceilings must be cleaned, painted and dry
S Subframes, cable ducts and floor openings must be provided in accordance
with the constructional drawings and designed with the correct dimensions
S No further work which creates dust and dirt shall be carried out once the con-
trol cubicles have been mounted

4.13.5.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles

The bay-integrated control cubicle is generally preassembled to the bay. The back
side of the cubicle is locked in the transportation position by four clamps and has to be
set up if necessary into its final position. The following steps must be observed:
Installation of Control Cubicle in Front of Busbars
Note The control cubicle is in elevated transport position and has to be lowered to its final
position.
1. Put a jacklift under the control cubicle, raise the forks (place squared beams
underneath as required) and take up the load without lifting the cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the back side of the cubicle
3. Lower the cubicle to a final height of 80 mm
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution:
In doing so, always retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the cubicle has been lowered, tighten the four clamps and remove the
jacklift
5. Switch on cubicle heating
Installation of Control Cubicle on Top of Busbars

1. Put a jacklift under the control cubicle, raise the forks (place squared beams
underneath as required) and take up the load without lifting the cubicle
2. Release the four clamps on the reverse side of the cubicle
3. Adjust the cubicle
(do this in stages if necessary − Caution:
In so doing, alway retighten and release the four clamps!)
4. Once the cubicle has been adjusted, tighten the four clamps and
remove crane ropes and lifting bracket
5. Switch on cubicle heating
4.13.5.5 Dismounting the Local Control Cubicle

1. Disconnect the cubicle from power supply
2. Disconnect cable connections from other control cubicles
(see order-specific drawings)
3. Disconnect connector cables and bay wiring
4. Remove the cubicle from the bay
(“4.13.5.4 Installation of the Local Control Cubicles”)

4.13.6 Conventional Bay Control

Basic Concept
The bay control of a switch-bay contains all those functions, which are necessary for a
secure operation of such a bay in a switchgear. The necessary equipment is located
in the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes of the HV-apparatus. The
splitting-up is made in that way, that the contactors for the motors and, for the C.B.,
the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located in the operating mechanism
housings.
4.13.6.1 Function List
Basic Functions
The following basic functions of the electric control are unrenouncable contained in a
conventional bay control:
S HV-apparatus control with pushbuttons
S HV-apparatus position indication with semaphore
S Alarm indication
S Antipumping control of C.B.
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low gas density level in the C.B.-housing
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low drive force level
S Synchronized pole unit operation check for C.B.
with 1-pole auto-reclosing (AR)
S Circuit breaker operation counting
S Hydraulic pump start-up counting
S Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump
S SF6-gas density supervision
S Bay interlocking
S Protection of disconnector and earthing-switches against switching under
load
S Intermediate position interlocking of the C.B.
S Double command lockout on bay level
S Electric hand-crank interlocking
S Hand-crank hole interlocking (only ELK-04)
S End-position interlocking
S Protection of the different voltage control circuits

Additional Standard Functions
In addition to the basic functions the following functions are included as standard:
S MCBs for protection of the low voltage circuits of voltage transformer
S Off / Local / Remote switch
S Station interlocking
S Interlocking bypass switch
S Interface remote control
S Cubicle lighting
Optional Equipment
As an option the following functions can be added on request:

S Metering
S Energy counter
S Socket
S Cubicle anti-condensation heating
S Operating mechanism anti-condensation heating
S Transducers
S Interposing relay
S Auxiliary switch contact reproduction
S Bus voltage replication
S Protection systems
S Remote control systems
S Numeric interlocking systems
S Trip circuit supervision
S Synchrocheck
S Parallel switching arrangement
S Arc detection
Optional Applications
As an option the following applications can be added on request:

S Additional spare terminals (10% spare are included as standard)
S Customer defined terminal types
S Ferrules
S Special wiring / cabling (coloured, halogen free, heat-resistant)

4.13.6.2 Functional Description
Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers mini
circuit breakers are used to distribute them onto several independent circuits.
AC:
S Anti-condensation heating and cubicle lighting
DC:
S Circuit breaker control and TRIP I
S TRIP II
S Disconnector / earthing switch control
S Disconnector / earthing switch motors
S Hydraulic pump motor
S Interlocking
S Position Indications
S Alarm signals
Cubicle Lighting
Via a door contact switch a incandescent bulb is switched. Because of the preferential
integrated mounting of the control cubicle to the switch bay and because of the impact
of the circuit breaker operation a layout resistant to shock is chosen.
Anti-condensation Heating (optional)
The heating of the control cubicle is controlled with a regulator dependant of

hygroscopic moisture and temperature.
HV-apparatus Position Indication
The positions of the high-voltage switching devices are displayed by semaphore posi-
tion indicators in the mimic diagram of the control cubicle. They are controlled by the
auxiliary switches of the high voltage switching devices.
Alarm Indication
Up to 16 single alarms are visualized per bay via the alarm indication combination
SSM16. This alarm indication combination consists of a switch board housing
96x96 mm.
The indication display is realized with 5 mm LED’s. The respective label strips are to
be inserted in transparency foil (in double rows with up to 21 mm text length and
10 mm heigth per channel).
The indication combination is provided with buttons for LED-test and -acknowledge.
The indication voltage may rise up to DC 250 V. There is a seperated potential from
the supply voltage.
The contacts of the relays for eventual remote signalling are potential-free and layed
out as standard as normally open contact.

Off / Local / Remote-changeover Switch
The operating status is selected via a control switch on bay level:

S Off
No switching operations are possible, alarms and indications remain active
S Local
The bay can be operated only locally
S Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level or from load
distribution
Protection of Disconnectors and Earthing-switches against Switching under

Load
The interlocking prevents the disconnector and earthing-switches from switching dur-
ing the circuit-breaker being closed.
Intermediate Position Interlocking of the Circuit Breaker
The circuit-breaker can be closed only if the disconnectors are in a defined ON or

OFF position.
Electric Hand-crank-hole Interlocking (only ELK-04)
The insertion hole for the hand crank on disconnectors and earthing switches is
closed by a sliding plate. If the interlocking requirements for the switching mechanism
are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of an electrically controled sole-
noid.
Electric Hand-crank Interlocking
With the hand-crank inserted the control voltage to the drive contactors will be inter-
rupted by limit switches.
End-position Interlocking
Disconnectors and earthing switches are lockable in the end position. A limit switch
causes the interlocking chain of the switching mechanism to be blocked, so that ac-
tivation is not possible.
Interlocking Bypass
The complete interlocking except the end-position and the hand-crank interlocking can
be by-passed by using a key-operated switch.
Antipumping Control of Circuit Breaker
Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit-breaker with

a continuous ON pulse and a simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching
(ON / OFF) is permissible. Manual switching ON is possible when an OFF pulse is
applied.

OFF-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
OFF-Blocking occurs, if the drive energy for a TRIP or if the SF6 gas density in the
C.B.-housing is too low.
ON-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
ON-Blocking occurs, if the drive energy for a CLOSE/TRIP-cycle or if the SF6 gas
density in the C.B.-housing is too low.
Synchronized Pole Unit Operation Check for C.B. with 1-pole AR
For circuit breakers with single pole operating mechanisms the synchronous operation
of the three poles is supervised. This causes an automatic trip of all three poles of the
circuit breaker if, after a delay of 2 seconds, all poles are not in the same switch posi-
tion.
Circuit Breaker Operation Counting
The operation counter P201, which records all the making operations of the circuit-
breaker, is connected in parallel to the making coil.
Hydraulic Pump Start-up Counting
The start-up counter P202, in parallel to the hydraulic pump motor, registers all start-
ing operations of the hydraulic pump.
Control and Supervision of the Hydraulic Pump

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following precondi-
tions:
− Circuit-breaker switched ON
S “Motor ON” travel stroke switch closed
− Circuit-breaker switched OFF
S “CO Blocking” travel stroke switch closed
Depending on the switch position a different reserve of energy is stored in
the operating mechanism. During connected (ON) position a OCO-cycle of
the circuit breaker is possible, during opened (OFF) position the energy store
ranges from OCO- (shortly charged) and CO-cycle.
This causes after switching off the circuit breaker, that the hydraulic pump will
not start pumping immediately, which is important to the batterie of the sys-
tem, specially at a trip of the busbar protection.
The control starts the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit breaker.
Inbetween approx. 10 seconds the energy is available for switching an OCO-
cycle.
A time characteristic of the starting hydraulic pump motors results of this con-
trol. A check of the travel time will cause stop pumping in the event of a fault.

4.13.6.3 Completion of Cubicle with Conventional Control
Mounting
The control cubicle contains all devices which are required for controlling and super-
vising a switch bay. The operation and indication elements are positioned at the front.
With opened door of the control cubicle the access to the devices and terminal strips
installed at the back and side walls. All devices and terminals are protected against
electric shock, this means safe for fingers in the operation area, in the inner cubicle at
least safe for the outer hand.
Mosaic / Operation Panel
In the cubicle front is a mosaic or an operation panel with a circuit diagram of the
switch bay, therein positioned semaphore position indicators for position indication of
the HV-apparatus. Beneath the position indicators are the push-buttons for switching
on or off the HV-apparatus. Beneath the position indicator of the circuit breaker are
addionally two impulse counters, one for counting of the switching cycles, the other for
counting the pump start-ups of the circuit breaker. On top of the circuit diagram
an ammeter and, if neccessary, a voltmeter, each with selector switch, are placed.
Inbetween both indication instruments an alarm indication device for up to 16 alarms
is positioned. Below this, the Off / Local / Remote switch is placed, below the single
line diagram the key switch for switching without locking is placed.
Construction
In the inner cubicle are placed beside the cubicle lighting and evtl. cubicle heating
also the MCBs for the different potential circuits, relays for interlocking double oper-
ation and interlocking, and terminal straps. The terminal straps are grouped in a func-
tional way.
The supervision of the circuit breaker and the drive contactors of the HV-apparatus
are not placed in the control cubicle but directly mounted in the drive housings.
Wiring
All wiring of the single devices to each other is realized with homogeneous black
switching wire, preferably with 1.0 mm2 profile.
Designation of Wire
If designations of wire are situated they consist of labeled straps which are inserted in
transparent tube applied on the wires. The designation straps may use up to 12 char-
acters for labelling per label. The labels are printed with the thermotransfere pro-
cedure.
Cabling
The connection between the operating mechanisms and the control cubicle is realized
with system cables with 50 or 64 core leads. Gas density monitor-, current- and if
necessary voltage transformer- as well as additionally heating-cables are inserted in
the cubicle by cable glands.
The cabling from the station side is inserted through the cubicle bottom. There is a
slidable bottom plate with chamfered egdes which leads to a variable gap for the in-
serted cables. Remaining gaps are filled on the construction site with mounting foam.

Table 4.13-3: Used Devices
Designation Usage
MCB with auxiliary switch Fuse protection
Door contact switch Switching on the light
Incandescent bulb (shock-resistant) Lightning
Thermostat / Hygrostat Regulation of anti-condensation heating
Anti-condensation heating Heating for control cubicle
Voltage / current measuring instrument Display of voltage / current
Control switch 3 positions, locking possible Choice of control level Off / Local / Remote
Control switch key operated with release Interlocking bypass
Control switch 7 positions Voltage measuring changeover switch
Control switch 4 positions Current measuring changeover switch
Pushbutton red Switching on HV-apparatus
Pushbutton green Switching off HV-apparatus
Position indicator STQ1G Position indicator circuit breaker
Position indicator ST1G Position indicator disconnector / earthing switch
Alarm indicator SSM16 Alarm indicator
Plug-in relais DC with socket Interlocking, double operation blocking
Plug-in relais AC with socket Voltage supervision
Impulse counter Circuit breaker operation counting,

hydraulic pump start-up counting
Terminal UDK4 Internal alarm indication, remote control,

heating, reserve contacts of HV-apparatus,
internal control, interlocking, synchronization
Terminal UK5-MTK-P/P External alarm indication
Terminal UK10 Ring conduit AC, DC
Terminal URTK/S Circuit breaker test terminals, protective signals
Terminal URTK/S Voltage transformer, current transformer
Terminal PVB 3 Potential distribution
Terminal USLKG10-1 Protector ground
Terminal AZK35 Cubicle ground
Pushbutton white (only for 2step control) Selection of switching device

4.13.7 Control System REF542plus

Basic principle
The bay control of a high voltage switch-bay contains all those functions necessary for
the safe operation of such a bay in an switchgear. The devices required are located in
the local control cubicle and in the connection boxes of the high-voltage devices. The
contactors for the motors and the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located
in the operating mechanism housings.
4.13.7.1.1 Basic Functions
User interface for local control system

S HV-apparatus control from the single line diagram
S HV-apparatus position indication
Alarm system
S Process alarms
S Logical alarms
S System alarms
CB operation counter
Measured Values
S Electrical current, three-phase
S Voltage, three-phase
Interlocking
S Bay interlocking
S Apparatus interlocking
S Protection of disconnector and earthing switches against switching under
load
S Intermediate position interlocking of the circuit breaker
S Station wide interlocking
S Interlocking against coupling, sectionalizer and busbar earthing switch
S Interlock override with key switch possible

S Time synchronisation
S HMI (human machine-interface)
S Selfsupervisor
S Conventional functions
S Antipumping control of circuit breaker (CB)
S Blocking or autotrip of the circuit breaker at too low gas density level in the
CB gas compartment
S Blocking or autotrip of the circuit breaker at too low drive force level
S Protection of the different control voltage circuits
S Cubicle lighting
S Socket
S MCBs for protection of the low voltage circuits of voltage transformer

4.13.7.1.2 Options
The following optional functions can be added on request:
Measurements
S Power
− Active power
− Reactive power
− Apparent power
S cos phi
Indications
S Indications from a protection system
S Indications from a transformer
Interface stations system (e.g. MicroSCADA) / remote control system
Optional Equipment
S Transducers
S Coupling relays
S Auxiliary switch contact reproduction
S Busbar replication
S Protection system
S Trip circuit supervision
S Synchrocheck
S Arc detection
Optional Applications
S Additional spare terminals (10% are included as standard)
S Customer-specific terminal types
S Ferrules
S Special wirings / cablings
(coloured, halogen-free, heat-resistant)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 − Sensor for electronic key switch 5 − ON button

2 − Emergency of circuit breaker 6 − Menu button
(has to be pressed together with 7 − Enter button
button 3 to trip the circuit breaker) 8 − Button to scroll up
3 − OFF button 9 − Button to scroll down
4 − Select button
Figure 4.13-5: REF542plus
The following list describes all the functions which are available and conventional wir-
ing between control cubical and GIS.
User interface for local control
The local control is possible via a display which is connected to the control unit of the
REF542plus via a serial interface. The display offers the following functions:
S Single line diagram in accordance with project-specific arrangement with dis-
play of the current positions of the switchgear
S Control switchgear devices
S Alarm acknowledgement
S OFF / LOCAL / REMOTE / LOCAL&REMOTE switchover
(via electronic key switch)
S 3 displays for measurements values
S Individual alarms on LED with full text description
in accordance with project-specific alarm configuration (max. 32)
HV apparatus control
The devices can be controlled locally at the display or via the station bus. Control is
possible after checking the various interlocking conditions and the switching authority,
with one switch impulse via binary output (BO). The circuit breaker will trip immediate-
ly when a protection device gives the command to trip.

HV apparatus position indication
Double point indications are picked up by binary inputs (BI) from the auxiliary switch of
the high-voltage devices and are displayed on the REF542plus display, and can also
be transmitted via the station bus. In the case of intermediate position of the switching
devices, an alarm is created and transmitted via the station bus.
Alarm system indication
Alarms are visible on the REF542plus display and transmission via the station bus is
possible. The alarms can be acknowledged either manually in the REF542plus menu
or automatically.
S Process alarms
(e.g. CB alarms, MCB trip, SF6 gas density from the GIS bay and messages
from the protection system via BI)
S Logical alarms
(e.g. intermediate position)
S System alarms
(e.g. computer malfunction)
Selection of the switching authority
With the REF542plus it is possible to realise four operating statuses, corresponding to

the position of the OFF / LOCAL / REMOTE / LOCAL&REMOTE switch:
S OFF
No switching actions are possible
S LOCAL
Switching actions are only possible from the local control system
(REF542plus display)
S REMOTE
Switching actions are only possible from a superordinate device (e.g. Station
control system).
S LOCAL&REMOTE
Switching actions possible from local and from a superordinate device.
This selection switch position can be transmitted via the station bus, including a time
stamp.
Switching cycle count CB
All switch-off procedures of the circuit breaker are registered via BI, shown on the dis-
play as a numerical value in the range 0 to 32767, and transmitted via the station bus.
Operation Measurement
Standard input sizes are 0 – 1 A and 0 – 100 V

S Electrical current:
The appropriate values (three-phase measurement) are shown on the dis-
play and can be transmitted via the station bus
S Voltage
The appropriate values (three-phase measurement) are shown on the dis-
play and can be transmitted via the station bus

Interlocking
All interlockings in the REF542plus are realised by function blocks in the application
software.
Interlock bypass
The complete interlocking − with the exception of the end position and hand crank in-
terlock − can be bypassed using a key switch.
S Interlock override with key switch
The complete interlocking − with the exception of the handcrank and the end
position interlock − is by-passed at this position. The mode can also be trans-
mitted via the station bus, including a time stamp.
Bay interlocking
S Device interlocking
Standard interlocking , low voltage side is included in the interlock.
S Interlocking against switching of the disconnector and earthing switches
under load
The interlock prevents switching of the disconnector and earthing switches,
as long as the appropriate circuit breaker is closed.
S Intermediate position interlock of the circuit breaker
The circuit breaker can only be switched on at a defined ON or OFF position
of the disconnector
S Hand crank interlock
When the hand crank is inserted in, the corresponding switching device, all
control is blocked. This message is transmitted via the station bus, including
time stamp.
S End position interlocking
When a switching device is locked, the corresponding switching device con-
trol is blocked.
Station wide locking

S Interlock against coupler, sectionalizer and bus bar earthing switch via trans-
mission of the corresponding signals via the station bus.
Time synchronisation
All connected REF542plus can be synchronised via the station bus.
Self supervision
The REF542PLUS checks its hardware components and program execution automati-
cally. The bus connections (if available) are also checked continuously.

Fuse protection for the electrical circuits
For reasons of selectivity, there are several electrical circuits in the bay cubicle:
AC:
S Cubicle heating and lighting
DC:
S Circuit breaker control and protection trip circuit #1
S Protection trip circuit #2
S REF542plus
S Disconnector and earthing switch control
S Disconnector and earthing switch motors
S Motor-hydraulic pump
S Interlocking
S Position indications
S Indications / Alarms
Cubicle lighting
A bulb is switched on via a door contact switch. Since integrated cubicles are used a
shock-proof design is selected because of the switch impact of the circuit breaker.
Cubicle heating (option)
The cubicle heating is switched on automatically by a regulator depending on humidity

and temperature.
Antipumping control of circuit breaker
Pump prevention stops the uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit breaker
when there is a continuous ON impulse and a simultaneously applied OFF impulse.
A single switching operation (ON / OFF) is permitted. With an applied OFF impulse, it
is possible to switch on manually.
OFF blocking of the circuit breaker
The OFF blocking occurs if the drive energy for a trip,or if the SF6 gas density in the
C.B. housing is too low.
ON blocking of the circuit breaker
The ON blocking occurs if the drive energy for a Close/Trip sequence or the SF6 gas
density in the C.B. gas compartment is too low.

Control and supervision of the hydraulic pump

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated under the following conditions:
− When the circuit breaker is switched on:
S Spring travel switch contact ‘Motor ON’ closed
− When the circuit breaker is switched off:
S Spring travel switch contact ‘CO blocking’ closed
In this way, varying energy reserves are stored in the operating mechanism
depending on the switch status. A circuit breaker OCO cycle is therefore al-
ways possible in the ON status, while in OFF status the energy reserve
ranges from OCO (newly recharged) to CO cycles.
This ensures that the hydraulic pump does not start up as soon as the circuit
breaker is switched off, which is particularly important for the battery layout of
an installation, especially when the bus bar protection causes several C.B.
trips.
The control starts up the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit
breaker. Within approx. 10 seconds, the energy required for an OCO cycle is
available again.
This results in staggered start-up times for the hydraulic pump motors. A time
relay limits the pump running time in the case of an error.

4.13.7.2.2 Options
The following optional functions can be added on request:
Measured Values
S Power
− Active power
The respective values are calculated from the electrical current and volt-
age in the REF542plus, shown on the display and can be transmitted via
the station bus.
− Reactive power
age in the REF542plus, shown on the display and can be transmitted via
the station bus.
− Apparent power
age in the REF542plus and can be transmitted via the station bus.
S cos phi
The appropriate values are measured and can be transmitted via the
station bus.
Indications
S Indications from protection system
− External protection system:
When using the REF542plus together with a protection system from an
external supplier, signals can be integrated via BI and transmitted to the
station control system via the station bus.
− Protection system with station bus connection:
The messages are transmitted from the protection device to the super-
ordinate control system via the station bus.
In this case, the disturbance recordings can be transmitted via the sta-
tions bus as well.
S Indications from transformer
The appropriate signals can be connected to the REF542plus using BI and
transmitted via the station bus.
Station control interface (e.g. for MicroSCADA) / remote control system
By using a plug-in board, the REF542plus can be connected to a bus system

(e.g. ABB LON Bus).
It is possible to use this to connect a station control system (e.g. ABB MicroSCADA)
or a remote control system.
This bus can be used in the monitoring direction to transmit the position indications of
the switchgear and the measured values.
In control direction, commands for the remote control of the bay can be received by
REF542plus.

4.13.7.3 Completion of SCADA-System Cubicles
Mounting
vising a switch bay. The control and display unit of the REF542plus is positioned at
the front or at the swivel frame. With opened door of the control cubicle an access to
the devices and terminal strips mounted on the rear or lateral sides of the cubicle is
granted. All devices are contact safe, this means finger safe in the operating area and
in the inner cubicle at least safe for back of the hand contact.
Completion of cubicles
Beneath cubicle lightning and eventually cubicle heating also the M.C.B.’s for the dif-
ferent voltage circuits as well as terminal strips are installed in the inner cubicle. The
terminal strips are grouped functionally.
The circuit breaker supervision as well as the operating mechanism contactors of the
high voltage devices are not mounted in the control cubicle but directly in the operat-
ing mechanism boxes.
Wiring
The wiring of the single devices one with another is performed with black switching
wire, preferably with 1.0 mm2 cross section.
Wire designation
If wire designations are applied they are made of label strips which are shoved in
transparent tubes mounted onto the switching wires. The designation plates allows a
labeling with approximately 12 characters per plate. The plates are labeled by the
thermotransfere method.
Cabling
The connection between the operating mechanisms and the control cubicle is per-
formed with 50 or 60core system cables. Gas density monitor, current and if necess-
ary voltage transformer as well as heating cables are inserted into the cubicle by
cable glands.
The cabling of the station side is performed through the cubicle floor. In the cubicle
floor a movable folded floor plate is located hence follows a variable gap for the in-
serted cables. Remaining gaps are filled with assembly foam on site.

4.13.8 Control System REC670

Basic Concept
The bay control of a switch-bay contains all those functions, which are necessary for a
secure operation of such a bay in switchgear. The necessary equipment is located in
the local control cubicle as well in the connection boxes of the HV-apparatus. The
splitting-up is made in that way, that the contactors for the motors and, for the C.B.,
the auxiliary contactors and -relays are directly located in the operating mechanism
housings.
Operator Interface: Local Control

S Single line diagram
S HV-apparatus control via single line diagram
S Indications
Alarm Indication
S Process alarms
S Logical alarms
S System alarms
Choice of Control Level
Measuring
S Current, single phase
S Voltage, single phase

Interlocking
S Bay interlocking
S HV-apparatus interlocking
S Protection of disconnectors and earthing-switches against switching under
load
S Release of electric hand-crank hole interlocking (only ELK-04)
S Hand-crank interlocking
S Station interlocking
S Interlocking against busbar couplers, busbar sectionalizers and busbar earth-
ing switches
S Interlocking bypass possible
S Time Synchronisation
S Man-Machine-Communication Interface
S Self Supervision
S Conventional Functions
S Antipumping control of C.B.
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low gas density level in the C.B.-housing
S Blocking or autotrip of C.B. at too low drive energy level
S Synchronized pole unit operation check for C.B. with 1-pole AR
S Protection of miscellaneous circuits
S Cubicle lighting
S Socket
S Protection of voltage transformer circuits

4.13.8.1.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current
− Earth-fault current
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage
− Earth-fault voltage
S Power
− Active power
− Reactive power
− Apparent power
S cos phi
Alarm Processing
S Protection signals
S Transformer signals
Automatics
S Connect / disconnect bay
S Transformer regulation
S Transformer fan control
S Petersen-coil regulation
Interface Station System (i.E. MicroSCADA)
Interface Remote Control

S Energy counter
S Transducer
S Interposing relay
S Auxiliary switch-contact reproduction
S Bus voltage replication
S Protection systems
S Synchrocheck
S Arc detection

Optional applications
S Additional spare terminals (10% spare are included as standard)
S Customer defined terminal types
S Ferrules
S Special wiring / cabling (coloured, halogen free, heat-resistant)


In the following a list of all functions which are possible in the REC670 with conven-
tional wiring between control cubicle and GIS:
Figure 4.13-6: REC670
1 − Status indication LEDs 5 − Local/Remote LEDs

2 − LCD 6 − RJ 45 port
3 − Indication LEDs 7 − Communication indication LED
4 − Label 8 − Keypad
Figure 4.13-7: REC 670, Graphic HMI

Operator Interface: Local Control
The local control is realized via an electroluminescent-display, which is connected to

the CPU of the REC670 with a serial interface, with the following functionality:
S Single line diagram according to the project specific single line diagram with
display of the position of the HV-apparatus
S HV-apparatus control
S Alarm acknowledge
S Off / Local / Remote changeover (via key switch)
S 3 measured values shown on the single line (up to 9 measured values on a
separate screen page)
S 15 single alarm LED’s or alarm list according to project specific alarm
configuration
HV-apparatus Control
The HV-apparatus may be controlled from local as well from remote via the interbay-
bus. The control is done under consideration of the different interlocking conditions
and the choice of control level with a switching signal via Binary Output (BO) to con-
ventional wired operating mechanisms. As there is a trip command of a protection
relay, the circuit breaker will be tripped directly. At an internal fault of the REC670 all
commands to the bay resp. to the HV-apparatus are blocked.
HV-apparatus Position Indication
Double position indication of the auxiliary switch of the HV-apparatus via Binary
Input (BI) and displaying the position of the HV-apparatus on the REC670 display and
transmission via the interbay-bus including time tagging. At an intermediate position
after a certain time, wich can be parametrized, an alarm is generated and transmitted
by the interbay-bus.
Alarms
Visualization on the front of the REC670 and the display as well as transmission via
the interbay-bus. The alarms can be acknowledged automatically or by a push button
on the front of the REC670. In the standard consecutive alarms are not suppressed.
S Process alarms
as CB-alarms, MCB-trip, SF6-gas density
S Logical alarms
as intermediate position
S System alarms
as controller fault, communication failure

Choice of Control Level

With the REC670 three levels of control are possible, according of the key-operated
Off / Local / Remote-changeover switch:
S Off
No switching operations are possible
S Local
The bay can be operated only locally
S Remote
The bay can be operated only by a superior control level
Those positions of the changeover switch are transmitted by the interbay-bus includ-
ing time-tagging.
All making operations of the circuit breaker are registered and displayed in the range
of 0 to 32767 and transmitted by the interbay-bus.
All start-ups of the hydraulic pump are registered and displayed in the range of 0 to
32767 and transmitted by the interbay-bus.
Measuring
Standard inputs are 0 to 1 A and 0 to 100 V

S Current, single phase
The values are measured three-phase, and displayed single-phase (L2) on
the display and transmitted by the interbay-bus
S Voltage, single phase
The values are measured three-phase as phase values and phase-to-phase,
and displayed phase-to-phase (L1-L3) on the display and transmitted by the
interbay-bus

Interlocking
All interlockings are realized in the REC670 software.
Interlocking Bypass
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position interlocking may be
by-passed with a key-switch.
S Interlocking bypass with external key-switch:
The complete interlocking except the handcrank and end-position interlock-
ing is by-passed in Local-position of the Off / Local / Remote switch in this
mode. It is transmitted by the process-bus including time-tagging.
Bay Interlocking
S HV-apparatus interlocking
standard interlocking including higher or lower voltage level
S Protection of disconnectors and earthing-switches against switching under
load
The interlocking prevents the disconnectors and earthing-switches from
switching during the circuit-breaker being closed.
The circuit-breaker can be closed only if the adjacend disconnectors are in a
defined ON or OFF position.
S Release of electric hand-crank hole interlocking (only ELK-04)
The insertion hole for the hand crank on disconnectors and earthing switches
is closed by a sliding plate. If the interlocking requirements for the switching
mechanism are fulfilled, the interlocking is deactivated by means of an elec-
trically controled solenoid.
With the hand-crank inserted the control of the respective drive is blocked.
This is transmitted by the interbay-bus including time-tagging.
Disconnectors and earthing switches are lockable in the end position.
This causes a blocking of the respective drive.
Station interlocking
S Interlocking against busbar couplers, busbar sectionalizers and busbar earth-
ing switches by transmission of the respective signals via the interbay-bus.

Time synchronisation
Via the interbay-bus all connected REC670 can be synchronized.
Man-Machine-Communication (MMC-Interface)
In reporting direction process data are transmissed cyclically. Additionally for certain
signals (events) a spontaneous transmission with time tagging is done.
In control direction the correct transmission of the received commands via the inter-
bay-bus is confirmed.
Self Supervision
All units based on the REC670 and the PISA-modules do a self-supervision with re-
spect to the hardware components as well as to program processing. All bus connec-
tions are checked permanently as well.
Circuit Protection
In order to be able to selectively disconnect and connect the various consumers micro
circuit breakers are used to distribute them onto several independent circuits.
AC:
S Anti-condensation heating and cubicle lighting
DC:
S Control circuit breaker and TRIP I
S TRIP II
S Processing computer
S Control disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanisms disconnector and earthing switch
S Operating mechanism hydraulic pump
S Interlocking
S Position Indications
S Interference signals
Cubicle Lightning
Via a door contact switch a incandescent bulb is switched. Because of the preferential
integrated mounting of the control cubicle to the switch bay and because of the impact
of the circuit breaker operation a resistance to shock layout is chosen.
Anti-condensation Heating (optional)
The heating of the control cubicle is controlled with a regulator dependant of

hygroscopic moisture and temperature.
Antipumping Control of Circuit Breaker
Pump prevention stops uncontrolled switching (pumping) of the circuit-breaker with

a continuous ON pulse and a simultaneously applied OFF pulse. Single switching
(ON / OFF) is permissible. Manual switching ON is possible when an OFF pulse is
applied.

OFF-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
OFF-Blocking occurs, if the drive energy for a TRIP or if the SF6 gas density in the
C.B.-housing is too low.
ON-Blocking of Circuit Breaker
ON-Blocking occurs, if the operating mechanism energy for a CLOSE/TRIP-cycle or if

the SF6 gas density in the C.B.-housing is too low.
Synchronized Pole Unit Operation Check for C.B. with 1-pole AR
For circuit breakers with single pole operating mechanisms the synchronous operation
of the three poles is supervised. This causes an automatic trip of all three poles of the
circuit breaker if, after a delay of 2 seconds, all poles are not in the same switch posi-
tion.
Control and Supervision of the Hydraulic Pump

S Control:
The hydraulic pump is activated alternatively under the following precondi-
tions:
− Circuit-breaker switched ON
S “Motor ON” travel stroke switch closed
− Circuit-breaker switched OFF
S “CO Blocking” travel stroke switch closed
Depending on the switch position a different reserve of energy is stored in
the operating mechanism. During connected (ON) position a OCO-cycle of
the circuit breaker is possible, during opened (OFF) position the energy store
ranges from OCO- (shortly charged) and CO-cycle.
This causes after switching off the circuit breaker that the hydraulic pump will
not start pumping immediately which is important to the batterie of the sys-
tem, specially at an indication of the busbar protection.
The control starts the hydraulic pump after switching on the circuit breaker.
Inbetween approx. 10 seconds the energy is available for switching an OCO-
cycle.
A time characteristic of the starting hydraulic pump motors results of this con-
trol. A check of the travel time will cause stop pumping in the event of a fault.

4.13.8.2.2 Options
Measuring
S Current
− Three-phase current:
The values are measured three-phase and displayed on the display and
transmissed three-phase by the interbay-bus
− Earth-fault current:
The value is measured, and displayed on the display and transmitted by
the interbay-bus
S Voltage
− Phase-to-phase voltage:
The values are measured three-phase and displayed on the display and
transmissed phase-to-phase by the interbay−bus
− Earth-fault voltage:
The value is measured, and displayed on the display and transmitted by
the interbay-bus
S Power
− Active power:
The values are calculated in the REC670 out of voltage and current, and
displayed on the REC670-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus,
including sign
− Reactive power:
displayed on the REC670-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus,
including sign
− Apparent power:
displayed on the REC670-display and transmitted by the interbay-bus
S cos phi
transmitted by the interbay-bus

Alarm Processing
S Protection signals
− Non-ABB protection relays:
Using the REC670 in connection with non-ABB protection relays, up to
12 signals per bay are connected through BI and transmitted to the sta-
tion level by the interbay-bus. In case fault recording is included, the re-
ports are transmitted through a separate bus system.
− Protection with interbay-bus connection:
Protection signals are transmitted to the REC670 and to the station con-
trol system.
In this case fault reports can be transmitted by the station bus.
S Transformer signals
Those signals are read into the REC670 by up to 12 BIs and are transmitted
by the interbay-bus
Automatics
S Connect / disconnect bay
Depending on a signal from station control system the chosen bay will be
switched to or from the selected busbar. The switching sequence is:
− Move all earthing switches in position off
− Switch on -QB1 or -QB2
− Switch on -BQ9
− Switch on -QA1
Interface MicroScada
There is the possibility to give out switch orders and get position indication as well as
reports of metering, operation counting, condition information and alarms including
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the station control. Those signals
are stored in a separate signal list.
Interface Remote control
There is the possibility to give out switch orders and get position indication as well as
reports of metering, operation counting, condition information and alarms including
time tagging of those by the communication unit to the remote control. Those signals
are stored in a separate signal list.

4.13.8.3 Completion of SCADA-System Cubicles
Mounting
vising a switch bay. The control and display unit of the REC670 is positioned at the
front or at the swivel frame. With opened door of the control cubicle an access to the
devices and terminal strips mounted on the rear or lateral sides of the cubicle is
granted. All devices are contact safe, this means finger safe in the operating area and
in the inner cubicle at least safe for back of the hand contact.
Completion of cubicles
Beneath cubicle lightning and eventually cubicle heating also the M.C.B.’s for the dif-
ferent voltage circuits as well as terminal strips are installed in the inner cubicle. The
terminal strips are grouped functionally.
The circuit breaker supervision as well as the operating mechanism contactors of the
high voltage devices are not mounted in the control cubicle but directly in the operat-
ing mechanism boxes.
Wiring
The wiring of the single devices one with another is performed with black switching
wire, preferably with 1.0 mm2 cross section.
Wire designation
If wire designations are applied they are made of label strips which are shoved in
transparent tubes mounted onto the switching cables. The designation plates allows a
labeling with approximately 12 characters per plate. The plates are labeled by the
thermotransfere method.
Cabling
The connection between the operating mechanisms and the control cubicle is per-
formed with 50 or 60core system cables. Gas density monitor, current and if necces-
sary voltage transformer as well as heating cables are inserted into the cubicle by
cable glands.
The cabling of the station side is performed through the cubicle floor. In the cubicle
floor a movable folded floor plate is located hence follows a variable gap for the in-
serted cables. Remaining gaps are filled with assembly foam on site.

Content
5 ¤ Service
Content
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1-1
5.2 SF6 gas absorber pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-1
5.2.1 Preparing the removal of the bursting disk assembly . . 5.2-2
5.2.2 Replacing the absorber pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-3
5.2.3 Replacing the bursting disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2-4
5.2.4 Installation of the pre-assembled bursting disk kit . . . . 5.2-5
5.3 Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.3.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3-1
5.4 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-1
5.4.1 Inspection of the Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism 5.4-2
5.4.2 Exchange of the Interrupting Chamber (3-pole and 1-pole Drive) .
5.4-3
5.4.3 Commissioning after Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4-6
5.5.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-2
5.5.2.1 Dismounting the Operating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-3
5.5.2.2 Opening of the Transversal Erection Module . . . . . . . . . 5.5-4
5.5.2.3 Dismounting the Busbar from the GIS Bay . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-5
5.5.3 Replacement of the Moving and the Fixed Contacts . . 5.5-6
5.5.4 Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-8
5.5.5 Removing the Outgoing Disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5-9
5.5.6 Reinstallation of the Outgoing Disconnector . . . . . . . . . 5.5-11
5.6.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism Motor . . . . . . . 5.6-3
5.6.3 Using the Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capac-
ity for Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6-4
5.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-1
5.7.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker . . . 5.7-1
5.7.2 Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-2
5.7.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-2
5.7.4 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . 5.7-2
5.7.5 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5.7.6 Other Switchgear Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7-3
5-1
Content
5.8 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1

5.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.2 Information on Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-1
5.8.3 GIS Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-2
5.8.4 Material of the GIS-Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8-4
5.8.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components . . . 5.8-6
5-2
¤ Service
5.1 Maintenance of the GIS

The operational safety of gas insulated switchgear is not affected by any external im-
pacts such as dirt, humidity etc. For this reason our SF6-gas insulated switchgear re-
quires virtually no maintenance.
Inspection:
Functional and visual inspections are carried out at 8-year intervals. The gas com-
partments are not opened for such inspections.
Maintenance:
The individual switchgears have to be controlled after a certian number of operations,

and their contacts are to be overhauled depending on the current loads imposed.
Such an overhaul requires opening the respective gas compartment. For the duration
of the maintenance the installation has to be partly taken out of service.
We recommend calling in our service for all work involving the interior parts of the
switchgear.
Note Please find our contact address in the product manual in section “Operation Instruction”
in chapter “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in document 1HDG 518 007 “Contact”.
Maintenance Schedule:
Table 5.1-1 summarizes all relevant inspection and maintenance intervals.
Table 5.1-1: Maintenance Schedule
Inspection after Maintenance after

5 000 operating cycles
2 closing operations
onto short circuit
20 fault clearings
Device
8 years
or
Overall Installation F
Circuit Breaker F F
Disconnector/Earthing Switch F F
Earthing Switch with short circuit

F F F
making capacity
1HDG 518 500 en 02.06.2004 EXTMEWE 03.06.2004 CHSVOTH 5.1-1

¤ Service
Regulations for Overhaul and Maintenance
O-rings
Note All O-rings which have been removed during maintenance work should be replaced by
new ones when remounting parts.
SF6 gas moisture filter
Note All SF6 gas moisture filters which have been removed during maintenance work should
be replaced by new ones when remounting parts.
Tightening torques for screws
Tightening torques for gas valves
Note The tightening torque for the coupling nut at the gas valve 1HDG 111 031 (Mounting a gas
density monitor, a tightening nut or an adapter) are 50 Nm. The coupling nuts (M30x2)
get not greased.
1HDG 518 500 en 02.06.2004 EXTMEWE 03.06.2004 CHSVOTH 5.1-2

¤ Service
5.2 SF6 gas absorber pack

warnings of the product documentation − especially the safety instructions in
tions” − have been read and were understood, and if all given conditions are ful-
filled. Otherwise, the manufacturer will not take any responsibility for damages
WARNING! All works related to SF6 are described in clause “Gas Insulated Switchgear” in
document 1HDG 518 005 ”Gashandling” and have to be followed strictly!
The SF6 gas absorber pack (5, Figure 5.2-1) is placed underneath pressing ring (3,
Figure 5.2-1) directly in the machined opening of the enclosure. The gas compartment
has to be de-energized and earthed on both sides for replacement of the absorber.
Then the SF6 has to be evacuated from the gas compartment and the pressure has to
be equalized with atmosphere. Afterwards the gas compartment with the bursting disk
can be opened. The pre-assembled bursting disk kit (10, Figure 5.2-1) must be re-
moved from the enclosure. Then the absorber is replaced. After the screws (8,
Figure 5.2-1) have been loosened the bursting disk must be replaced by a new burst-
ing disk. For this the bursting disk kit must be disassembled. After replacement of the
bursting disk the bursting disk kit is assembled again and installed to the enclosure.
Then the gas compartment is filled with SF6 and the GIS bay re-energized.
CAUTION After the screwing connection (7, Figure 5.2-1) or (8, Figure 5.2-1) has been loos-
ened the bursting disk must be replaced, because the loosening of the screws in-
fluences the bursting performance of the bursting disk. Replace also bursting
disks which appear to be undamaged by a new bursting disk.
CAUTION Bursting disk

S Treat carefully
S Round surface of bursting disk must not be damaged
S Scratches on sealing surface are not permissible
S Bursting disk must be replaced by a bursting disk of the same type after
replacing the absorber pack

¤ Service
CAUTION Absorber
S Take care that absorber material is dry when inserting a new absorber
S Check the humidity indicator (accompanies the absorber material)
S Observe the maximum installation time (2 h) until the gas compartment must
be filled with N2 or SF6
S This is valid for all climatic conditions except rain or fog when the absorber
material can get in contact to water
Note Replace the SF6 gas absorber only in a dry environment.
5.2.1 Preparing the removal of the bursting disk assembly

Figure 5.2-1 shows the complete bursting disk assembly. The bursting disk (4) is as-
sembled between the upper (2) and the lower pressing ring (3). The assembly consist-
ing of bursting disk, upper and lower pressing ring is called bursting disk kit in the fol-
lowing. The absorber (5) is fixed between the pre-assembled bursting disk kit and the
enclosure. It is placed directly in the machined opening of the enclosure.
8 9
10
7
2
6
3
1 5
1 − Enclosure 6 − O ring
2 − Upper pressing ring 7 − Small screws
3 − Lower pressing ring 8 − Screws
4 − Bursting disk 9 − Deflection cover
5 − Absorber 10 − Pre-assembled bursting disk kit
Figure 5.2-1: Complete bursting disk assembly

1. De-energize GIS bay and earth active parts on both sides
3. Equalize pressure with atmosphere
Do not open gas compartment before these steps have been carried out.

¤ Service
5.2.2 Replacing the absorber pack

1. Loosen screws (6) (Figure 5.2-2)
2. Remove deflection cover (1)
3. Loosen screws (3)
4. Remove bursting disk kit (2)
5. Remove complete absorber (5)
6. Replace complete absorber by a new absorber pack
7. Replace O-ring (4) by a new O-ring
8. Replace bursting disk (see clause 5.2.3)
1 − Deflection cover 4 − O-ring

2 − Pre-assembled bursting disk kit 5 − Absorber
3 − Screws 6 − Screws
Figure 5.2-2: Removing the bursting disk kit and replacing the O-ring and absorber

¤ Service
5.2.3 Replacing the bursting disk

1. Loosen screws (4) (Figure 5.2-3)
2. Remove bursting disk (2)
3. Replace O-ring (3) by new O-ring
4. Replace bursting disk (2) by new bursting disk. Therefore insert bursting disk
into lower pressing ring (5). The machined opening prevents the bursting
disk from moving
5. Install pressing ring (1) with screws (4)
6. Tighten screws (4) with the specified torque
2
3
4
1 − Upper pressing ring 4 − Screws
2 − Bursting disk 5 − Lower pressing ring
3 − O-ring
Figure 5.2-3: Replacing the bursting disk and O-ring

¤ Service
5.2.4 Installation of the pre-assembled bursting disk kit

1. Fix the pre-assembled bursting disk kit with screws (3, Figure 5.2-2) to the
enclosure. Fasten the screws in a cross-like manner within three steps ac-
cording to the sequence specified in Figure 5.2-4. After each step increase
the tightening torque according to the following values:
1st step: Tightening torque 8 Nm
2nd step: Tightening torque 16 Nm
3rd step: Tightening torque 26 Nm
2. Install deflection cover (1, Figure 5.2-2). Install the designation plate of the
new bursting disk under on of the screws
4. Check bursting disk flange for leakage
1st step: 8 Nm 2nd step: 16 Nm 3rd step: 26 Nm
3 5 9 11 15 17
1 2 7 8 13 14
6 4 12 10 18 16
Figure 5.2-4: Fastening the screws within three steps

¤ Service
5.3 Control Devices

Conventional Design
5.3.1 Maintenance
All control devices of the GIS are maintenance-free.
5.3.2 Inspection
During inspection the devices and their proper functions are being checked.
Circuit Breaker Operation Counter
The number of operations of the circuit breaker are counted. Check the reading of the
operation counter once a year.
Note After 5 000 operations: Overhaul the circuit breaker. The procedures associated with
overhauling the circuit breaker are described in chapter “Service” in document “Circuit
Breaker”.
Pump Start Counter
The number of starts of the hydraulic pump are counted. Check the reading of the
pump start counter once a year.
Note All works associated with the handling of the operating mechanism of the circuit breaker
are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” for
ELK-04 / 735 in document “Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 118 576 for
HMB-1 (1HDG 118 577 for HMB-2 and 1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S), for ELK-04 / 520 in
document 1HDG 918 753 (1HDG 118 578 for HMB-1S).
Micro Circuit Breakers
Micro circuit breakers shall be operated at least once a year.
Filter Elements for Louvers
Control cubicles equipped with filter elements for louvers have to be checked once a
year. In case of pollution the filter elements must be changed.
Maintenance
Maintenance of the secondary devices of the GIS can not be recommended.

Exchange defective devices against original spares of the same type (refer to the
parts lists in the secondary drawings included in the project specific part of the docu-
mentation).

¤ Service
5.4 Circuit Breaker

SF6 gas insulated switchgear requires only a minimum of maintenance as indicated in

Table 5.4-1.
Service work to be performed after
Component 20 short circuit breakings

8 years 5 000 CO under operating conditions at
rated breaking current
Interrupting Chamber − Replace Replace
Circuit Breaker Operating

Inspection Inspection −
Mechanism
SF6 Gas Moisture Filter − Replace Replace
O-Rings
Note Replace all O-rings that have been removed during maintenance by new ones prior to
reassembly.
SF6 Gas Moisture Filter

Note The replacement of the SF6 gas moisture filters is described in chapter “Service” in
document “SF6 gas moisture filter” 1HDG 918 781.
Tightening Torques for Screws
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note All works associated with the handling of the operating mechanism of the circuit breaker
are described in detail in chapter “Equipment and Functions Descriptions” in document
“Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism” 1HDG 918 753 (3pole operation) and document
1HDG 118 578 (single pole operation).

¤ Service
5.4.1 Inspection of the Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

Note All maintenance work involves the operation of the circuit breaker. For this reason, the
system has to be set up to allow for operation of the isolated circuit breaker.
CAUTION The circuit breaker shall only be operated when filled with SF6 at least to the mini-
mum functional pressure!
Inspection
For a routine inspection after 8 years of operation the following steps a) through e)
have to be carried out. After overhauling the conducting path the additional steps f)
through i) have to be performed.
a) Check the number of operations
b) Check the number of pump starts
c) Inspection of the carbon brushes (min. height: 11 mm)
d) Inspection of the drive elements: drive shaft bushings
e) Inspection of the drive elements: auxiliary switch position indicator
f) Functional test OPEN coil 1:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 1 to contact separation)
g) Functional test OPEN coil 2:
(Time measurement: pulse output OPEN coil 2 to contact separation)
h) Functional test CLOSE coil:
(Time measurement: pulse output CLOSE coil to contact touching)
i) Measurement of charging time after one CO operation
Note The operating diagrams and the technical data are listed in detail in chapter “Equipment
and Functional Descriptions” in document “Circuit Breaker” 1HDG 918 750.

¤ Service
5.4.2 Exchange of the Interrupting Chamber

(3-pole and 1-pole Drive)
Once the specified maximum numbers of current interruptions respectively operations
has been reached, the interrupting chamber path needs to be changed (see
Table 5.4-1). The exchange of the interrupting chamber requires accessing the circuit
breaker gas compartment.
WARNING! The circuit breaker must be isolated and earthed on both sides during overhaul.
Dismounting of the Interrupting Chamber (Figure 5.4-1)
The following sequence refers to the flange connections of a double busbar feeder
and might be transferred to other flange arrangements. Take the following steps when
dismounting the interrupting chamber:
1. Evacuate the SF6 from the circuit breaker compartment and ventilate circuit
breaker with air
2. Pull off the plug connection from the secondary terminals (6)
3. Disconnect the feed lines of the anti-condensation heater and
the gas density relay
4. Dismount the top of the drive enclosure (7) after releasing the fasteners
5. Release the rod between outer lever and auxiliary switch (13)
6. Dismount the fixing of the auxiliary switch and the auxiliary switch
7. Remove the coupling bolt between the joint rod and the outer lever (12)
(1pole: carry out 3 times, 3pole: carry out 1 time)
8. Dismount the drive (14) and the drive enclosure (7) by loosening the screws;
eventually, release the screwed connections of supply current asseccories to
dismount the operating mechanism housing (7)
9. Dismount the cover (9) from the housing for the bell crank (5)
(carry out 3 times)
10. Dismount the coupling bolt (8) between the inner lever and the operating rod
(carry out 3 times)
11. Remove the circuit breaker cover (4) with the bursting disk assembly
12. Connect the interrupting chamber to a crane hook at the fitting bolt of the op-
erating rod
13. Pull the interrupting chamber (1) carefully in position OFF to the limit stop
14. Release the bolted connections (16)
15. Lift off the interrupting chamber (1) inclusive the bolted connections (2)
16. Dismount bolted connections (2) and clean them

¤ Service
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
6
5
15
3
16
16
2
18
17
16
1 − Interrupting Chamber 11 −
Screws
2 − Bolted Connection 12 −
Coupling area to operating mechanism
3 − Coupling Bolt (Operating Rod) 13 −
Connecting lever auxiliary switch
4 − Circuit Breaker Cover 14 −
Operating Mechanism
5 − Housing for Bell Crank 15 −
Drive rod
6 − Secondary Terminals (incl. Adapter and fitting screw)
7 − Operating Mechanism Housing 16 − Bolted Connection
8 − Coupling Bolt (inner) 17 − Clamping Connection, not shown
9 − Cover Housing for Bell Crank 18 − Screws, not shown
10 − Coupling Bolt (outer), not shown
Figure 5.4-1: Circuit Breaker with Operating Mechanism (3pole)

¤ Service
Assembly of the Interrupting Chamber (Figure 5.4-1)

1. Mount connecting conductors (2) onto interrupting chamber
(tightening torque 75 Nm)
2. Pull drive rod (15) of the interrupting chamber (1) in direction OFF carefully to
the limit stop
3. Fix the interrupting chamber (1) to a crane hook at the fitting bolt of
the operating rod
4. Insert the interrupting chamber (1) into the circuit breaker gas compartment
5. Mount the bolted connections (16) onto horizontal conductors in flange
(tightening torque 75 Nm)
6. Put the drive rod (15) in position ON
(for doing so, use adjusting gauge or adjust dimension A (Figure 5.4-2))
4 Dimension A: 265 mm + 1 mm
moving direction
to be checked
1 2 3
1 − Drive rod 4 − Thread for current connections
2 − Nut (conductor connections)
3 − Fitting bolt
Figure 5.4-2: Interrupting chamber in position ON (CLOSED)
7. During all further mounting steps check that the moving direction of the drive
rod (1) is aligned with the direction of the threads for the current connections
(conductor connections) (4) (Figure 5.4-2) −
if not, bring drive rod (1) with lightly secured fitting bolt (3) with the movable
part of the interrupting chamber in the respective direction!
8. Adjust length of fitting bolt to the upper edge of the circuit breaker gas com-
partment to dimension B (Figure 5.4-3) or use mounting fixture,
put Loctite No. 241 onto the screwed connection and
screw with tightening torque 100 Nm+10%
9. Pull the drive rod (15) with the adjusted fitting bolt carefully in direction OFF
10. Mount the circuit breaker cover (4) with bursting disc assembly, operating
mechanism housing (7) and operating mechanism (14)
11. Couple the fitting bolt with inner coupling bolt (8)
12. Place the interrupting chambers in CLOSE position (Figure 5.4-3):
Dimension C
(Distance between upper edge of the housing for the bell crank to the upper
edge of the fitting bolt)

¤ Service
7 6 2 1
Dimension C:
151 mm
Tolerance: +0.5 mm
−1.5 mm
Dim. B:
70.5 mm
±0.5 mm
5 3 4
1 − Upper edge fitting bolt partment
2 − Upper edge housing for bell crank 5 − Inner lever
3 − Middle of coupling bolt 6 − Outer lever
4 − Upper edge circuit breaker gas com- 7 − Lock nut
Figure 5.4-3: Coupling of Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism

(3-pole Operating Mechanism, pos. ON=CLOSE)
Coupling with Operating Mechanism (Figure 5.4-3)
In order to couple the operating mechanism it has to be in the ON (CLOSE) position.

The interrupting chambers have to be in the ON (CLOSE) position, as well (distance
151 mm). Adjust the lock nut (7) so that the eyebolt can be coupled with coupling bolts
to the outer lever (6). During the coupling the blow cylinder and the operating mechan-
ism must not be moved out of their ON (CLOSE) positions. The position of the inner
lever (5) with coupled operating rod shall not be moved.
Couple one time the 3-pole operating mechanism and three times the 1-pole operat-
ing mechanism.
Checking of Interrupting Chamber Stroke (Figure 5.4-3)
After carried out mounting of interrupting chamber and coupling check the chamber
stroke:
For this purpose put the coupled interrupting chamber by moving manually the operat-
ing mechanism skid in position OFF (OPEN). The dimension of the upper edge of the
housing for the bell crank (2) to the upper edge of the eye bolt (1) has to be 41 mm
(tolerance: +0.5 mm − 1.5 mm) instead of 151 mm.
The outcome of this is an interrupting chamber stroke of 110 mm

(tolerance: ±2 mm).
5.4.3 Commissioning after Overhaul

Fill gas compartments with SF6.
After conclusion of all works associated with the overhaul a shortened commissioning
test has to be performed. See chapter 5.4.1 Inspection od the circuit breaker operat-
ing mechanism, steps f) to i).

¤ Service
5.5 Disconnector / Earthing Switch

SF6-gas insulated switchgear is virtually maintenance-free. Only the works listed in

the following Table 5.5-1 need to be performed.
Works to be performed after
Component Disconnector Earthing Switch

8 years
5 000 CO operations 1 000 CO operations
Motor Inspection Inspection Inspection
Gear Box Inspection Inspection Inspection
Auxiliary Switches Inspection Inspection Inspection
Solenoids Inspection Inspection Inspection
Main Contacts − Inspection Inspection
SF6-Gas Moisture Fil-

− Replacement Replacement
ter
Note All instructions given in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of
the GIS” need to be observed.

¤ Service
5.5.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism

We recommend to protocol the inspection of the operating mechanism according to
the maintenance protocol.
Note Maintenance involves the operation of the disconnector / earthing switch. The installation
has to be brought into a configuration that allows switching without load.
The following checks shall be performed during inspection:

S Mechanical function test of the operating mechanism with handcrank (OPEN-
CLOSE)
S Inspection of the motor limit switches, the handcrank interlocking and of the
position indicators
S Test of the neutral and the end positions
S Test of the handcrank and the end position locking
S Visual inspection of the electrical connections
S Electrical function test of the operating mechanism (OPEN-CLOSE)
S Measurement of the motor current at rated supply voltage
S Check of the carbon brushes
S Function test of the anti-condensation heaters (if applicable)

¤ Service
5.5.2 Maintenance of the Current Path

WARNING! Prior to opening the disconnector / earthing switch make sure that it is deenerg-
ized and earthed on both sides.
5.5.2.1 Dismounting the Operating Mechanism
Dismounting the Disconnector / Earthing Switch Operating Mechanism
Note Pay attention to the potential spring mounted in the insulating rod when pulling out the
rotary bushing (Figure 5.5-1). This potential spring needs to be put back in place when
reinstalling the operating mechanism.
8 7 6
5
4
1 2 3
1 − Securing screws 6 − Plug connection

2 − Screws for rotary bushing 7 − Transmission shaft
3 − Rotary bushing 8 − Disconnector / earthing switch
4 − Potential spring operating mechanism
5 − Insulating rod
Figure 5.5-1: Dismounting of the Disconnector / Earthing Switch Operating Mechanism
Dismounting of the Operating Mechanism (Figure 5.5-1)

1. Switch the operating mechanism into neutral position (OPEN)
2. Disconnect the heater leads
3. Remove the connectors from the plug connections (6) on the back of the
operating mechanism (8) (Figure 5.5-1)
4. Remove the four securing screws (1) from the operating mechanism
5. Lift the complete operating mechanism (8) off the enclosure
6. Remove the 6 screws (2) of the rotary bushing (3) and pull out the bushing;
pay attention to the potential spring (4)
7. Remove the insulating rod (5) to the first phase

¤ Service
5.5.2.2 Opening of the Transversal Erection Module

The transversal erection module (Figure 5.5-2) allows transversal connections and
expansion-compensated coupling of GIS enclosures, e.g. of busbars.
In order to replace the current path, the busbar module needs to be dismounted from
the GIS bay. For this, the transversal erection module of the busbar module to be dis-
mounted and the one of the adjacent GIS bay need to be opened. Thus, the adjacent
GIS bay needs to be deenergized, as well.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
11 12
1 − Screw 7 − Screw
2 − Transversal erection ring 8 − Threaded sleeve
3 − Spring washer fitting 9 − Distance sleeve
4 − Locking sleeve 10 − Insulating bolt
5 − Loose washer 11 − Washers
6 − Nut 12 − Transversal erection module enclosure
Figure 5.5-2: Transversal Erection Module
1. Tie the loose washer (5) with the nut (6) to the spring washer fitting (3) until
the locking sleeve touches the washers (11) (Figure 5.5-2)
2. Lock the spring washer on the adjacent transversal erection module in the
same way
4. Loosen the threaded sleeve (8) and remove the screw (1)
5. Remove the spring washer fitting (3)
6. Remove the other screws and nuts of the flange connection
7. Insert the transversal erection module in direction of the arrow (make sure
that the sealing surface of the transversal erection module enclosure is not
damaged)

¤ Service
5.5.2.3 Dismounting the Busbar from the GIS Bay

The dismounting of the busbar from the GIS bay is shown in Figure 5.5-3:
10
9
8
11 7
6
5
1 2 3 4 2
1 − Conductors 7 − Splined shaft
2 − Screws 8 − Flange connection
3 − Busbar enclosure 9 − Opposite flange
4 − Busbar insulator 10 − Insulator
5 − Contact support 11 − Screws
6 − Earthing contact
Figure 5.5-3: Busbar with Transversal Erection Module opened on both sides
1. Loosen the screws (2) and remove the conductors (1) (Figure 5.5-3)
2. Loosen the nuts of the flange connection (8) on the busbar side (the insulator
(10) remains bolted to the opposite flange (9))
3. Slide the busbar enclosure (3) with the busbar insulator (4) out of the bolts of
the insulator (8)
4. Move the busbar enclosure (3) appr. 50 mm in direction of the open trans-
versal erection module of the adjacent GIS bay
5. Remove the busbar enclosure (3) with the busbar insulator (4) from the GIS
bay in direction of the arrow
(make sure that the busbar enclosure is moved appr. 50 mm out of the cen-
ter position in direction of the arrow to prevent damages between the earth-
ing contact (6) and the contact support (5))
6. Loosen the screws (11) and remove the contact support (5) with the insu-
lating rod and the splined shaft (7)

¤ Service
5.5.3 Replacement of the Moving and the Fixed Contacts

CAUTION Potential springs are placed between all insulating rods and splined shafts; they
need to be put back into place prior to reinstallation!
11
1
10
2
4
9
3
12 16
4 13 2
9
15
8
3 14
7
5
4 6 7
1 − Busbar enclosure 7 − Guide band 12 − Splined shaft

2 − Gear plate 8 − Contact pin 13 − Insulating rod
3 − Cog rod 9 − Cog wheel 14 − Guide ring
4 − Spring contact 10 − Earthing contact 15 − Potential spring
5 − Fixed contact 11 − Insulator 16 − Screw
6 − Contact support
Figure 5.5-4: Replacement of Moving and Fixed Contacts
1. Loosen the screw (16) and remove the gear plate (2), the guide ring (14), the
cog wheel (9) and the contact pin (8) from the contact support (6)
(Figure 5.5-4)
2. Remove the fixed contact (4) and the guide band (7) from the contact sup-
port (6) and replace them
3. Remove the spring contacts (4) from the fixed contact (5) and the earthing
contact and replace them
4. Install new cog rods (3) in the new contact pins (8)
5. Insert the new contact pins (8) into the contact support (6) and bring it into
the neutral position

¤ Service
6. Install the cog wheel (9) and the new guide ring with the gear plate (2) in the
contact support (6); make sure that the mark on the cog wheel (9) is pointing
at the center of the cog rod of the contact pin when positioned in the neutral
position. (Figure 5.5-4)
The details of cog wheel installation are shown in Figure 5.5-5.
1 − Cog rod
2 − Mark
3 − Cog wheel
Figure 5.5-5: Installation of Cog Wheel

¤ Service
5.5.4 Reinstallation
Note For reinstalling the contact supports a slide gauge is required.
Reinstallation of the Contact Supports and the Busbar Enclosure

1. Install the contact supports (8) with the splined shafts (12), the insulating
rods (13) and the potential springs (15) on the insulator (11); the contact sup-
ports (6) need to be aligned to the insulator (11) by means of a slide gauge
(Figure 5.5-4)
2. Install the busbar enclosure (3) with the busbar insulator (4) on the GIS bay
(Figure 5.5-3)
3. Install the conductors (1) (Figure 5.5-3)
4. Install the insulating rods (5) to the first phase with the potential springs (4)
and the rotary bushing (3); pay attention to the position of the slit in the insu-
lating rods (5) (Figure 5.5-1)
5. After installing the rotary bushing (3, Figure 5.5-1) appr. 10 switching cycles
(without operating mechanism) must be executed with the lever (Tool-No.
60 20 46 70); after this, the torque of the transmission shaft (7, Figure 5.5-1)
has to be p 40 Nm
6. Make sure that the operating mechanisms are in the neutral position
7. Install the operating mechanisms; make sure that the operating mechanisms
and the contact pins do not move out of the neutral position during coupling
8. Switch the disconnector / earthing switch with the operating mechanism into
positions “Disconnector CLOSE” and “Earthing Switch CLOSE”; check via
the open transversal erection module the neutral position of the moving con-
tacts (the moving contacts may look max. 1.5 mm out of the contact support)
9. Close both transversal erection modules (12) and install the spring washer
fitting (3); make sure that the threaded sleeves (8) cover at least 6 mm of the
insulator bolts (Figure 5.5-2)
10. Mount the remaining screws and nuts and the conductors of the flange con-
nection
12. Loosen the locked spring washers with the screw (1) (Figure 5.5-2)
13. Secure the loose washers (5) against vibrating (Figure 5.5-2)
Note After conclusion of the maintenance, carry out an inspection of the disconnector /
earthing switch operating mechanism.

¤ Service
5.5.5 Removing the Outgoing Disconnector

Removing the outgoing disconnector from the switchgear bay
The outgoing disconnector enclosure has to be removed in order to dismount the con-
ducting path. Further, the cable sealing end’s enclosure from the flange 1, and it’s
insulator, are moved down about 80 mm in the direction of arrow B (Figure 5.5-6).
1. The combined disconnector / earthing switch is to be connected without
voltage, and both sides are to be grounded (to make sure that the cable is
grounded over the counterstation)
3. Dismount the adjacent module on flange 3 (Figure 5.5-6)
4. Lower the cable sealing end enclosure (2) with the cable sealing end (1)
appr. 80 mm in the direction of arrow B, until the contact (3) is positioned
below flange 1
5. Dismount the disconnector / earthing switch operating mechanism (“5.5.2.1
Dismounting the Disconnector / Earthing Switch Operating Mechanism”)
6. Loosen the nuts of the flange 2 on the outgoing side (the insulator remains
bolted to the flange 2)
7. Slide the enclosure (5) with the support insulator (8) out of the bolts of the
insulator on flange 2
8. Move the enclosure (5) appr. 50 mm in direction of the detached cable
sealing end (1)
9. Remove the enclosure (5) with the support insulator (8) from the GIS bay
in direction of the arrow A
(make sure that the enclosure (5) is moved appr. 50 mm out of the center
position in direction of the arrow to prevent damages between the earthing
contact and the contact support (7))
10. Loosen the screws (6) and remove the contact support (7) with the insulating
rod and the splined shaft
11. Replace the moving and the fixed contacts (“5.5.3 Replacement of the
Moving and the Fixed Contacts”)

¤ Service
Voltage transformer side

Flange 3
8
7
Circuit breaker side

Flange 4
Flange 2
6
A 5
Flange 1
4
B 3
1 − Cable sealing end 5 − Enclosure

2 − Cabel sealing end enclosure 6 − Screws
3 − Contact 7 − Contact support
4 − Adjacent flange cable sealing end enclosure 8 − Support insulator
Figure 5.5-6: Cable Sealing End with combined Disconnector / Earthing Switch

¤ Service
5.5.6 Reinstallation of the Outgoing Disconnector

Note An slide gauge is required for the reinstallation of the contact support.
Reinstallation of the contact support and the outgoing enclosure

1. Attach the contact support (8) together with the splined shafts (12), the insu-
lating rods (13) and the potential springs (15) on the insulator (11); the con-
tact supports (6) need to be aligned to the insulator (11) by means of a slide
gauge (Figure 5.5-4)
2. Install the enclosure (5) with the busbar insulator (7) on the GIS bay
(Figure 5.5-6)
3. Install the dismounted cable sealing end enclosure (2) with the cable sealing
end (1) on flange 1 (Figure 5.5-6)
4. Install the insulating rods (5) to the first phase with the potential springs (4)
and the rotary bushing (3); pay attention to the position of the slit in the insu-
lating rods (5) (Figure 5.5-1)
5. After installing the rotary bushing (3, Figure 5.5-1) appr. 10 switching cycles
(without operating mechanism) must be executed with the lever (Tool-No.
60 20 46 70); after this, the torque of the transmission shaft (7, Figure 5.5-1)
has to be p 40 Nm
6. Make sure that the operating mechanism is in the neutral position
7. Install the operating mechanism; make sure that the operating mechanism
and the contact pins do not move out of the neutral position during coupling
8. Switch the disconnector / earthing switch with the operating mechanism into
positions “Disconnector CLOSE” and “Earthing Switch CLOSE”; check via
the open transversal erection module the neutral position of the moving con-
tacts (the moving contacts may look max. 1.5 mm out of the contact support
(Figure 5.5-6))
9. Finish the installation of the adjacent module on flange 3 (Figure 5.5-6)
10. Mount the remaining screws and nuts and the conductors of the flange con-
nection
Note After conclusion of the maintenance, carry out an inspection of the disconnector /
earthing switch operating mechanism.

¤ Service
5.6 Earthing Switch

with Short Circuit Making Capacity
SF6-gas insulated switchgear is virtually maintenance-free. Only the works listed in

Table 5.6-1 below need to be performed.
Works to be performed after

Component
8 Years 1 000 CO 2 Short Circuit Makings
Motor Inspection Inspection −
Drive mechanics Inspection Inspection −
Auxiliary Switches Inspection Inspection −
Main Contacts − Replacement Replacement
SF6-Gas Moisture Filter − Replacement Replacement
Note All instructions given in chapter “Installation” in document 1HDG 518 200 “Installation of
the GIS” need to be observed.

¤ Service
10
11
12
13
14 9
15
22 16 6
21 7
17
20 6
8
19 18
1 − Plug device 9 − Snap spring 16 − Contact tube

2 − Rods (auxiliary switch) 10 − O-ring 17 − Contact support
3 − Contactors 11 − Fixed contact 18 − O-ring
4 − Cog wheel 12 − Contact pin 19 − Connector (earthing bridge)
5 − Motor pinion 13 − Earthing frame (insulation) 20 − Damping rubber
6 − Limit switch (motor) 14 − O-ring 21 − Auxiliary switch
7 − Operating mechanism motor 15 − Contact segments 22 − Cover
8 − Limit switch (interlocking)
Figure 5.6-1: Operating Mechanism and Main Contacts of the Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity

¤ Service
5.6.1 Inspection of the Operating Mechanism Motor

Note Maintenance involves the operation of the earthing switch with short circuit making
capacity. The installation has to be brought into a configuration that allows switching
without load.
Works to be performed during Inspection:

S Mechanical function test with the handcrank (OPEN-CLOSE)
S Inspection of the limit switches, the handcrank interlocking and of the position
indicator
S Test of the handcrank and the end position locking
S Visual inspection of the electrical connections
S Electrical function test of the operating mechanism (OPEN-CLOSE)
S Measurement of motor current at rated supply voltage
S Function test of the anti-condensation heater (if applicable)
5.6.2 Maintenance of the Current Path

For maintenance of the main contacts the earthing switch with short circuit making
capacity is dismounted from the GIS.
WARNING! Prior to dismounting the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity deen-
ergize and earth the active parts on the opposite flange.
Replacement of the Current Path (Figure 5.6-1)

1. Deenergize and earth the active parts on the opposite flange
2. Close the earthing switch
4. Remove the plug from the plug device (1)
5. Disconnect the heater leads
6. Remove the earthing switch from the GIS
7. Unbolt the connectors (19) from the contact support (17)
8. Unbolt the contact support (17) from the enclosure of the earthing switch
9. Remove the guide with the damping rubber (20) from the enclosure
10. Pull out the earthing frame (13) with the contact tubes (16) and the contact
pins (12)
11. Replace the damping rubber (20)
12. Remove the contact segments (15) from the contact support (17) and re-
place with new ones
13. Replace the contact tubes (16) and the contact pins (12) with new ones
14. Mount the contact support (17) with a new O-ring (14)

¤ Service
15. Bolt the connectors (19) back on the contact support (17)
16. Replace the fixed contacts (11) with new ones
17. Bolt the earthing switch with a new O-ring (10) back on the GIS flange
Note After conclusion of the maintenance, carry out an inspection of the operating mechanism
of the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity.
5.6.3 Using the Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making

Capacity for Measurements
Follow the instructions below for measuring the voltage drop or the switching times of
the circuit breaker:
Dismounting
1. Remove the cover (22) (Figure 5.6-1)
2. Close the earthing switch with short circuit making capacity either manually
or electrically
3. Lock in the end position (6) or (8)
4. Remove the connectors (19)
5. The individual main current paths are accessible through the three connec-
tion points (3)
6. Carry out the measurement
Mounting
1. Install the connectors (19) (Figure 5.6-1)
2. Remove the end position locking (8)
3. Put the cover (22) back in place

¤ Service
5.7 Troubleshooting
Practical experience has shown that strict adherence to the recommendation of this
instructions will ensure the best proceed to restore the function of the switchgear.
These instructions are based on the present technical design. ABB reserves the right
to make any technical changes.
5.7.1 Hydraulic Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker

Table 5.7-1: Troubleshooting operating mechanism of circuit breaker
Trouble Reasons Remedical Measures
Operating mechanism is not charged MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

automatically Supply voltage lacking Secure the supply voltage
Motor defective Replace the motor
Coal brushes worn out Replace the coal brushes
Motor is running but the disc spring as- Pressure release screw in the position Close the pressure release screw
sembly is not tensioned “open”
Changeover valve in intermediate Press the rubber cap of the OPEN-
position (only HMB-1 and HMB-1S) solenoid
Pump defective Replace the pump
Oil level too low Refill the oil
Filter clogged Exchange the filter
Operating mechanism does Tripping voltage lacking Secure the tripping voltage
not trigger Coil defective Replace the coil
Auxiliary switch does not transmit the Adjust the auxiliary switch
command
Auxiliary switch defective Replace the auxiliary switch
Corrosion in the operating mechanism Heating MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on
housing Heating voltage lacking Secure the heating voltage
Heating plate defective Replace the heating plate
Mechanism housing not tight Check the seals of the operating
mechanism housing and if necessary
replace them
Operating mechanism too often Pressure release screw not in the Close the pressure release screw
repumps position “closed”
(On an average more than Internal leak Operate the operating mechanism
20 times per day / 600 times several times
per month)
If the trouble continues: Perform the leak
test and if necessary inform ABB.
*) MCB = mini circuit breaker
1HDG 518 510 en 01.07.2002 ACEMEWE 25.09.2002 ACEVOTH 5.7-1

¤ Service
5.7.2 Circuit Breaker

Table 5.7-2: Troubleshooting circuit breaker
Fault Cause Remedy
Lower SF6-pressure Alarm of pilot relay Check leakage rate:

“Low SF6-pressure” <1% / year is normal
S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
S Check flange seals and change the
faulty seal
S When sealing system is ok, check
electric circuit
Circuit breaker is locked Alarm of pilot relay Check SF6-pressure

“Circuit breaker locked” Check charging condition of operating
mechanism
Check electric circuit
5.7.3 Disconnector / Earthing Switch

Table 5.7-3: Troubleshooting disconnector / earthing switch
Fault Cause Remedy
Low SF6-pressure Alarm of pilot relay Check leakage rate:

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit
Operating mechanism not running MCB* tripped Switch on MCB*

Supply voltage locking Secure supply voltage
Motor defect Change motor, check limit switch
Conductor defect Change conductor
No ON-/OFF-Signal MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

Control voltage lacking Secure the control voltage
5.7.4 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity

Table 5.7-4: Troubleshooting earthing switch with short circuit making capacity
Fault Cause Remedy
Operating mechanism not running MCB* tripped Switch on MCB*

Supply voltage locking Secure supply voltage
Motor defect Change motor, check limit switch
Conductor defect Change conductor
No ON-/OFF-Signal MCB* tripped Switch the MCB* on

Control voltage lacking Secure the control voltage

¤ Service
5.7.5 Voltage Transformer

Table 5.7-5: Troubleshooting voltage transformer
Fault Cause Remedy

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit
5.7.6 Other Switchgear Modules

Table 5.7-6: Troubleshooting other switchgear modules
Fault Cause Remedy

S filling up gas.
>1% / year:
faulty seal
electric circuit

¤ Service
5.8 Disposal of Equipment Component Parts

5.8.1 General
GIS is environmental-friendly. After end of life of a GIS (estimated to 30 − 50 years)
the GIS-components shall be disposed. Several working groups are currently elabor-
ating guide-lines for disposal (e.g. CIGRE). Therefore this manual only can give brief
recommendations for disposal. For details please refer to the actual CIGRE-publica-
tion or contact your local ABB-service department.
5.8.2 Information on Disposal

All GIS components can be disposed of in accordance with the applicable laws and
regulations and in an environmentally friendly way. The disposed component parts
can be utilized as mixed or pure scrap. The scrap contains the following material,
which can all be considered as non-hazardous:
S Metals (aluminium, ferrous and non-ferrous metals)
S Porcelain and ceramics
S Plastics (PA / PTFE / silicon)
S Cast resin
S Filter material (AL2O3)
S Electronic components
S Oil and grease
S Acrylic varnish
The SF6 gas has to be removed with the appropriate equipment (e .g. DILO) and can
be recycled after filtering and drying. Open gas compartments might contain solid SF6
decomposition products generated during switching operations. All gaseous decom-
position products are bound in the filtering material.
WARNING! SF6 decomposition products might cause irritation to the skin, the eyes and the
mucous membranes.
Note For the disposal of switchgear using SF6 as insulating or arc quenching medium all
relevant safety measures have to be taken. Make sure to comply with all respective
national and local regulations. The return of SF6 gas is contractually regulated with the
SF6 suppliers. ABB will guarantee the return of SF6 gas in accordance with the applicable
regulations.
Prior to disposal of the components, the hydraulic oil contained in the operating mech-
anism of the circuit breaker has to be removed and disposed of separately.
WARNING! The disk spring column is mechanically precharged with high tension forces.
Disassembly of disk spring should be handled by authorized personnel only
according to ABB procedure and safety regulation. For disposal, the local regula-
tions and laws should be followed. The different materials and utilities used in HMB
drives are listed in this document.
The local ABB representatives will be happy to help you with any questions relating to
disposal of equipment components.

¤ Service
5.8.3 GIS Components

Please refer to Figure 5.8-1 to Figure 5.8-6 for the single GIS-components.
Table 5.8-1 will give more details about the material.
13
15 14
1 12 11
2
6 7
10
3
9
8
4 5
1 − Local control cabinet 8 − Cable plug
2 − Operating mechanism disconnector/ 9 − Cable plug and socket
earthing switch 10 − Cable termination
3 − Disconnector/earthing switch 11 − Fast acting earthing switch
4 − Circuit breaker 12 − Support insulator
5 − Support structure with base frame 13 − Voltage transformer
6 − Barrier insulator 14 − Current transformer
7 − Disconnector/earthing switch 15 − Operating mechanism circuit breaker
Figure 5.8-1: GIS with Cable Termination
Figure 5.8-2: Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism HMB-1

¤ Service
4 3 2 1
1 − SF6-air bushing 3 − Busduct

2 − SF6-air termination 4 − 90°-angle piece
Figure 5.8-3: GIS with angle piece, busduct and SF6-air termination
Figure 5.8-5: Inductive Voltage Transformer
Figure 5.8-6: 30°-Angle Piece

¤ Service
5.8.4 Material of the GIS-Components

Table 5.8-1: Material of the GIS-Components
GIS-Component Weight Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Total Weight
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Index-No. and Name
Plastics
SF6
Portion of total component weight in
%:
Figure No. All GIS-components incl. conductor, without insulators kg kg
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depending on the
type
Figure 5.8-1 1 Local control cabinet 200 − F F F F

Figure 5.8-1 2 Operating mechanism disconnector/earthing switch 25 − F f F f
Disconnector/earthing switch, 3-flange

Figure 5.8-1 200 3 F f F f f
without transversal erection module

Figure 5.8-1 3 250 4 F f F f f
with transversal erection module
Circuit breaker without operating mechanism and

Figure 5.8-1 4 795 28 F f f f f f
without integrated current transformers
Figure 5.8-1 5 Support with base frame 90 − F
Figure 5.8-1 6 Barrier insulator 26 − F f F

Figure 5.8-1 7 210 4 F f F f f
without transversal erection module

Figure 5.8-1 260 5 F f F f f
with transversal erection module
Figure 5.8-1 8 Cable sealing ends for plug-and-socket type F f F F
Figure 5.8-1 9 Cable termination with plug and socket, type C 85 2 F
Cable termination with insulators acc. to IEC 210 4 F
Figure 5.8-1 10 Cable termination 40 − F f f F +
Figure 5.8-1 11 Fast acting earthing switch incl. operating mechanism 50 1 F f f f f
Figure 5.8-1 12 Support insulator wthout ring 13 − F F

Support insulator with ring 18 − F f F
Figure 5.8-1 14 Integrated current transformer 90 − F F F F f

Figure 5.8-2 CB Operating mechanism (HMB-1) 120 − F F f f F F
Figure 5.8-3 1 SF6-air bushing, porcelain, 1600 A, 72.5 kV 100 1.5 F F

Figure 5.8-3 1 SF6-air bushing, porcelain, 1600 A, 123 kV 135 1.5 F F
Figure 5.8-3 1 SF6-air bushing, porcelain, 2500 A, 72.5 kV 130 1.5 F F

Figure 5.8-3 1 SF6-air bushing, porcelain, 2500 A, 123 kV 165 1.5 F F
Figure 5.8-3 1 SF6-air bushing, silicon, 2500 A, 123 kV 45 6 F F

* Al-Metals = Aluminium, Non-ferr. Metals = Non-ferrous Metals

¤ Service
GIS-Component Weight Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Total Weight
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Index-No. and Name
Plastics
SF6
Portion of total component weight in
%:
Figure No. All GIS-components incl. conductor, without insulators kg kg
F > 1 , f < 1 , + = depending on the
type
Figure 5.8-3 2 Trificator for SF6-air bushings 55 2 F +
Busduct 250 mm length (without insulators) 40

Figure 5.8-3 3 F +
Busducts over 250 mm: additional weight per m 36 4
Figure 5.8-3 4 Angle piece 90° 60 4 F +
Figure 5.8-4 Separate barrel-type current transformer 350 7 F F F F f
Figure 5.8-5 Inductive voltage transformer 425 9 F F F f

Figure 5.8-6 Angle piece 30° 60 4 F +
O-rings for enclosure flanges 0.3 − F

Amount of acrylic varnish per GIS bay
Indoors appr. 3 kg
Outdoors appr. 6 kg

¤ Service
5.8.5 Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components

Table 5.8-2: Environmental persistence of the GIS-Components
Harmful Substances Material
Porcalin/Ceramics
Non-ferr. Metals *
Electronic Comp.
Ferrous Metals
Filter Material
Oil, Grease
Cast Resin
Al-Metals *
Harmful substances in the air
Plastics
F = non-critical
Chem.
Designation f = non-critical, as long as international limit values are
formula
not exceeded
SO2 Sulfur dioxide F F f F f f f f F
NOx Nitrous oxide F F f F f f f f f

CO Carbon monoxide F F F F F f f F f
Hydro carbons
C6 H6 − Benzene (Phenyl hydride)
HCHO − Formaldehyde F F F F f f f f f
C2 H4 − Ethylene
CLx COx − Perchlorethylen
O3 Ozone F F F F f f f F f
Dust
SO4 − Sulfate
F F F F F F f f f
NO3 − Nitrate
Pb − Lead
Heavy metals (i.E. cadmium) F F F F f f f f f

ABB High Voltage Products

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB High Voltage Products

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation Manual SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear

Erection and Maintenance GIS

ABB AG - High Voltage Products

Main List of Documents

Erection and Maintenance

4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions

Erection and Maintenance

4 ¤ Equipment and Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.6 Earthing Switch with Short Circuit Making Capacity . . . . . . . . . 4.6-1

4.12 High Voltage Detection System (HVDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12-1

4.13 Control Cubicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13-1

1.1.1.2 Types of packaging

Wooden support/skid and protective sheeting

Requirements for container

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-1

General container requirements

1.1.1.3 Container data

1.1.1.4 Environmental factors

The preservation required depends on the method of transportation, the storage

Storage requirements and classifications are described in detail in chapter “Delivery”

Protection against condensation of humidity is provided for a transportation period of

The packaging may be monitored by means of moisture indicators.

1.1.1.6 Sealing of equipment

All open flanges must be sealed with a shipping cover.

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-2

1.1.1.7 Packing and unpacking of equipment

When unpacking switchgear components, check shock indicators on packag-

1.1.1.8 Securing of equipment

Make sure that loads are evenly distributed.

1.1.1.9 Shipping marks

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-3

1.1.2.2 Means of transportation

1.1.2.3 Forces and stresses during transportation

Figure 1.1-1: Forces and stresses during transportation

Table 1.1-1: Forces in g (g = Acceleration due to gravity)

Railway 4.0 g 0.5 g 0.4 g

Road 1.0 g 2.0 g 0.6 g

Ship 0.4 g 2.0 g 0.8 g

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-4

Check shipping container for any damage before opening.

Photographs shall be taken of any damaged packaging to serve as evidence at a later

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-5

1.1.5 Standards and regulations

Standards and regulations of the country of destination shall be considered, if appli-

Applicable regulations and guidelines issued by ABB shall also be observed.

1HDG 918 706 B en 23.01.2009 EXTMEHA 14.09.2009 CHSVOTH 1.1-6

1.2 Receiving Inspection

Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_____of_____

1HDG 518 100 en 26.06.1998 ACEMEWE 29.06.1998 ACEHENE 1.2-1

1.3.2 Storage Requirements

A − Airconditioned storage building D − Tarpaulin

1HDG 518 101 A en 18.04.2005 EXTMEWE 26.04.2005 CHSVOTH 1.3-1

Table 1.3-1: Product Example

Instruments (electrical and electronic) or similarly sensitive

Less sensitive material D

General outdoor material D

Hot dipped galvanized material D

Epoxy cast resin D

Table 1.3-2: Protection against ...

Pressure from stacking and/or excessive cramped packing D D D D D D

Rain and snow D D D D

Extreme temperatures (beyond the permissible range) D D D

Protocol for Receiving Inspection Page_of_